SGS Mark⢠Userâs Manual SCANVEC GARMENT SYSTEMS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT This agreement gives you certain rights and duties regarding the Software Program, the Userâs Guides and the copy protection key (the âKeyâ) that you are licensing from Scanvec Garment Systems Ltd. (âScanvec Garment Systemsâ). The Software Program, the Userâs Guides and the Key will be referred together here as the âLicensed Materialsâ. 1. License grant and termination. Scanvec Garment Systems grants you personal, non-transferable, non-exclusive license to use the Licensed Materials for the ordinary purposes of your business. If you breach any terms of this Agreement, this license will immediately terminate and you must promptly return the Licensed Materials to Scanvec Garment Systems. The Licensed Materials are proprietary products of Scanvec Garment Systems, and Scanvec Garment Systems retain title to and ownership of the Licensed Materials. 2. Scanvec Garment Systems copyright, etc. no copies or transfer, etc. You acknowledge that the Licensed Materials are protected by copyrights held by Scanvec Garment Systemsâ parent company. You acknowledge that Licensed Materials embody trade secrets owned by Scanvec Garment Systemsâ parent company. You may not copy any part of the Licensed Materials for any purpose. You may not disassemble, decompile, reverse engineer or otherwise modify, tamper with or make changes to the Licensed Materials under any circumstances. You may not rent, lease, loan, assign or transfer the Licensed Material to any third party. You may not allow any third party to use the Licensed Materials or to make copies of them. You may not use the Software Program without the Key. You may not emulate, duplicate, replace or modify the Key. 3. Warranty, disclaims, remedies. Scanvec Garment Systems warrants that the Media containing the Software Program (the âCDâsâ) are free from defects of materials and workmanship. SCANVEC GARMENT SYSTEMS DISCLAIM ALL OTHER EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES REGARDING THE CDâs AND THE LICENSED MATERIALS. You agree that your only remedy for any breach of the above warranty will be that if you discover any defects in the CDâs within three months after receiving them, Scanvec Garment Systems will replace the defective CDâs with non-defective CDâs. 4. No damages beyond Purchase Price. You agree that if, in connection with your use of the Licensed Materials, you incur direct or indirect injury of any kind, including injury to persons or property or lost profits, Scanvec Garment Systems shall be liable to you only for the Product Price. In no event will Scanvec Garment Systems, its stockholders, directors, officers or employees be liable to you for any damages, including lost profits or other incidental or consequential damages arising out of your use or inability to use the Licensed Materials. Copyright 2001, Scanvec Garment Systems ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Table of Contents Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures ______________________ 1 Welcome to OptiTex! ____________________________________________________ 1 How to Use This Book ___________________________________________________ 2 Package Contents _______________________________________________________ 3 Registration____________________________________________________________ 3 Help Services Provided __________________________________________________ 3 Technical Support ______________________________________________________ 4 Installing OptiTex_______________________________________________________ 5 Configuring OptiTex to Your Plotter _______________________________________ 9 Configuring Output Control Center (OCC) as output manger _________________ 12 Setting Up a Plotter ____________________________________________________ 15 Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars_______________________________________ 17 The Tools _____________________________________________________________ 17 System Toolbar ________________________________________________________ 21 Marker Toolbar _______________________________________________________ 26 Piece Toolbar _________________________________________________________ 37 Alignment Toolbar _____________________________________________________ 45 Placement Toolbar: ____________________________________________________ 49 Group Toolbar:________________________________________________________ 58 General Toolbar _______________________________________________________ 63 Chapter 3: File Menu_______________________________________________ 71 New (Ctrl+N) _________________________________________________________71 Open Marker File (Ctrl + O)_____________________________________________71 Open Marker Dialog Box: _______________________________________________72 Merge Several Markers _________________________________________________73 History_______________________________________________________________74 Open Style File ________________________________________________________77 Import from SGS Modulate _____________________________________________82 File Finder____________________________________________________________84 Save (Ctrl + S)_________________________________________________________95 Save As ______________________________________________________________95 Save Current Nesting ___________________________________________________97 Export to CAD/CAM Files _____________________________________________100 Layers Table Dialog Box: ______________________________________________103 Dictionary Dialog Box:_________________________________________________104 Export to DXF and AAMA Setup: _______________________________________106 Import from CAD/CAM Files___________________________________________108 Layers Table Dialog Box: ______________________________________________119 Dictionary Dialog Box:_________________________________________________121 Plot_________________________________________________________________123 Plot Options _________________________________________________________146 Plotter Setup _________________________________________________________148 Plotter Setup Dialog (OCC)_____________________________________________149 Print _______________________________________________________________ 150 Report to Excel and E-Mail utilities______________________________________ 153 Exit (Alt+F4)_________________________________________________________ 157 Chapter 4: Piece Menu_____________________________________________ 159 Info (Ctrl+I) _________________________________________________________ 159 All Sizes Info _________________________________________________________ 166 Global Info __________________________________________________________ 168 Delete _______________________________________________________________ 170 Flip Vertical _________________________________________________________ 171 Flip Horizontal _______________________________________________________ 172 Make Hole (Ctrl+H) ___________________________________________________ 173 Join Pieces ___________________________________________________________ 174 Edit Piece____________________________________________________________ 174 Piece Pattern Editor Dialog Box: ________________________________________ 175 Rotate_______________________________________________________________ 178 Internals (Ctrl+E)_____________________________________________________ 180 Internal Text _________________________________________________________ 184 Holes and Internal Contours ____________________________________________ 185 Global Change Internals Parameters _____________________________________ 189 Place Selected Pieces___________________________________________________ 191 Chapter 5: Marker Menu___________________________________________ 197 Marker Definitions (Ctrl+M) ___________________________________________197 Marker List __________________________________________________________201 Clear Marker (Ctrl+C)_________________________________________________202 Remove (DEL or CTRL+R)_____________________________________________202 Piece Parameters______________________________________________________203 Copy Marker _________________________________________________________208 Duplicate (Ctrl+D) ____________________________________________________208 Array _______________________________________________________________209 Alignment____________________________________________________________212 Replace Pieces on Marker ______________________________________________215 Substitute ____________________________________________________________217 Detect Intersections____________________________________________________221 Check Current Solution ________________________________________________221 Highlight Selected pieces _______________________________________________222 Optimize Marker Cut/Plot Order ________________________________________223 Shared lines __________________________________________________________224 Optimum Calculations _________________________________________________229 Weights______________________________________________________________232 Bump/Cut lines _______________________________________________________232 Fabric Pattern ________________________________________________________233 Load Fabric Dialog Box ________________________________________________235 Stripe Definition ______________________________________________________239 Relate Piece to Stripes (Shift+Home) _____________________________________ 243 Match ++ ⢠_________________________________________________________ 245 Undo (Ctrl+Z) ________________________________________________________ 247 Redo (Ctrl+Y) ________________________________________________________ 247 Chapter 6: Group Menu____________________________________________ 249 To Create a Group: ___________________________________________________ 249 Substitute size for selected pieces ________________________________________ 249 Keep ________________________________________________________________ 250 Ungroup_____________________________________________________________ 251 Fix on Marker________________________________________________________ 251 Unfix Selected ________________________________________________________ 251 Unfix All ____________________________________________________________ 252 Stripe Adjust Group (Ctrl+G)___________________________________________ 252 Rectangular Block Fuse (Ctrl+B) ________________________________________ 253 Thrifty Block Fuse ____________________________________________________ 255 Optimum Block Fuse __________________________________________________ 255 Select Whole Bundle___________________________________________________ 255 Unify Pieces Orientation _______________________________________________ 256 Substitute One Bundle _________________________________________________ 256 Copy Size for Selected Pieces____________________________________________ 256 Chapter 7: View Menu _____________________________________________ 257 Pieces on Marker _____________________________________________________ 257 Display Pieces on Marker Dialog Box: ____________________________________ 257 Cut/Plot Order _______________________________________________________ 263 Stripes Lines _________________________________________________________ 263 Marker Full Length ___________________________________________________ 263 Zoom All Pieces on Marker _____________________________________________ 264 Piece Bar ____________________________________________________________ 264 Size Lists ____________________________________________________________ 264 Spread Marker _______________________________________________________ 266 Piece List ____________________________________________________________ 266 Zoom View Window ___________________________________________________ 267 Tool Bars ____________________________________________________________ 267 New Toolbar _________________________________________________________ 268 Customize ___________________________________________________________ 269 View the Status Bar ___________________________________________________ 270 Chapter 8: Options Menu __________________________________________ 271 Stripe Adjust _________________________________________________________271 Single Piece Gap ______________________________________________________271 Limit Rotation ________________________________________________________273 Round After Rotation __________________________________________________273 Colors _______________________________________________________________274 Fonts________________________________________________________________276 Working Units ________________________________________________________278 Preferences___________________________________________________________279 Post Saving Action /Export to ASCII Application___________________________286 AutoSave (Backup) file _________________________________________________287 Chapter 9: Nesting Menu___________________________________________ 289 Stop_________________________________________________________________289 Continue_____________________________________________________________289 Start AutoNesting _____________________________________________________290 Auto Nest Selected Pieces _______________________________________________291 Auto Nesting To Separate Block _________________________________________291 Renest Pieces on marker________________________________________________291 Compact Arrangement_________________________________________________291 Duplicate Marker _____________________________________________________292 Auto Nesting Setup ____________________________________________________292 Auto Save of Markers__________________________________________________294 Compact Arrangement (Ctrl J) __________________________________________296 Duplicate Marker _____________________________________________________296 Solutions Reports _____________________________________________________297 Start Batch___________________________________________________________300 Stop Batch ___________________________________________________________310 Continue Batch _______________________________________________________311 Batch Messages _______________________________________________________311 AutoNest Queue_______________________________________________________311 Queue Menu__________________________________________________________312 Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation_______________________________ 315 Installing Algotex Plotters with SGS Software _____________________________ 315 Hewlett Packard 600 or 700 Ink Jet Plotter _______________________________ 318 Hewlett Packard 750C Ink Jet Plotter____________________________________ 325 Configuring the Hewlett Packard Draftmaster II Plotter ____________________ 334 Ioline 28 Plotter ______________________________________________________ 342 Ioline 600 Plotter _____________________________________________________ 352 Ioline Studio Plotter___________________________________________________ 362 Ioline Stylist Plotter ___________________________________________________ 371 Configuring the Ioline Summit Plotter For Use With SGS Software ___________ 379 Plotter Technology Plotter _____________________________________________ 393 Calcomp TechJet 720 Plotter ___________________________________________ 400 Gerber AP300 and AP310 Plotters_______________________________________ 406 Gerber AP700 Plotter _________________________________________________ 411 NovaJet Plotter_______________________________________________________ 416 Numonics Design Partner 9000 Plotter ___________________________________ 424 Summagraphic HighPlot 7100/7200 Plotter _______________________________ 431 Lectra plotter ________________________________________________________ 438 Configuring the Cutting Edge Cutter ____________________________________ 443 Eastman Cutter ______________________________________________________ 447 Configuring the Gerber Cutter S3250 ____________________________________ 451 Configuring the Gerber Cutter S-91 _____________________________________ 453 Configuring the Gerber Cutter S-93 _____________________________________ 456 Chapter 11: Help Menu ____________________________________________ 459 Index (F1) ___________________________________________________________ 459 Keyboard____________________________________________________________ 459 Using Help ___________________________________________________________ 460 Check Plug Protection _________________________________________________ 460 About OptiTex Mark __________________________________________________ 460 SGS On-Line _________________________________________________________ 460 Send File ____________________________________________________________ 461 How to Contact SGS___________________________________________________ 462 Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands ____________________________________ 463 Pull Down Menu Shortcut Keys _________________________________________ 463 Other Shortcut keys ___________________________________________________ 465 Uses of the Right Mouse Button _________________________________________ 467 Rotating Pieces with the Mouse__________________________________________ 467 Rotating Pieces with the Rotate Tool _____________________________________ 467 Moving Pieces with the Bump, Bump/Rotate, and Jump/Rotate Tools__________ 467 Moving Overlapped Pieces _____________________________________________ 468 Fabric Spreading Methods _____________________________________________ 468 Defining Pieces as Foldable _____________________________________________ 468 Placing Folded Pieces __________________________________________________ 469 Unfolding Pieces ______________________________________________________ 469 Scroll Bars Automatic Utility ___________________________________________ 470 Creating a Group _____________________________________________________ 470 Shortcut Key Table: ___________________________________________________ 471 Glossary Terms ___________________________________________________ 477 Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures 1 Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures Welcome to OptiTex! OptiTex is your complete software solution for computerized pattern design, grading and marker making. It was created specifically for the manufacturer of the apparel, transportation interiors, upholstery and sewn products industries. OptiTexâs powerful CAD tools enable you to draft pattern scratch or modify existing pattern quickly and accurately. Simply import a pattern from your favorite CAD/CAM program, create a new pattern using OptiTexâs freehand design tools or utilize OptiTexâs unique digitizing capabilities. With OptiTexâs digitizing function, your pattern appears on your computer screen as you digitize. If you make a mistake, simply erase it with the click of a button. The OptiTex digitizing system is designed to work the way you want to work. You can enter piece perimeters first, then enter notches, internals and other piece information later. Itâs quick, easy and compatible with industry standard digitizers. Once your patters have been created and entered, OptiTex provides a multitude of interactive editing tools. The most commonly used design and editing tools are represented as icons in the OptiTex toolbar so you can access commands with the click of a mouse; thereâs no need to navigate through a series of pull down menus. Add or remove different types of notches, create darts, add seam allowances pleats and buttons and view everything on screen as you are working. Add, move or delete points of a pattern, or move entire section of a pattern to quickly lengthen or shorten pieces. And obtaining measurement has never been easier. Whether youâre measuring vertically, horizontally, diagonally or between pattern pieces, OptiTexâs measuring tool is as easy to use your own tape measure. Mark Manual2 OptiTex Makes grading pattern pieces quick, simple and automatic is just as interactive as the editing process. Grade any pattern, point by point or globally according to previously stored rules. OptiTex enable you to witness the results immediately on screen. With OptiTex , itâs easy to create your own rule libraries, add new rules or remove old ones. You can even grade internals such as notches, dart, pleats, buttons and lines. When it comes to marker making, OptiTex provides both manual and automatic nesting capabilities to help you design markers quickly and efficiently. In addition, OptiTex gives you the flexibility to change order quintets, substitute size, change marker dimensions and additional patterns to your marker from other styles. Match your pattern piece to specific locations on your striped, plaid or printed materials. With the extensive training and knowledgeable technical support services we offer, we are confident you will find OptiTex to be most users Friendly production tool you have experienced. Thank you choosing OptiTex. How to Use This Book This manual is design to mirror your computer interface. The chapters are based on the pull down menus and tool icons. To find information in this book, use the index, table file, which allows you to view, print or save pertinent information. The remainder of this chapter is dedicated to explaining the different training and technical support services SGS offer. Lastly, we offer complete installation directions with pictures. Feel confident knowing that you not only purchased the most complete software package for computerized pattern design, grading and marker making, but also that SGS will continue to support you in every way we can. Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures 3 Package Contents Security Lock ** VERY IMPORTANT** OptiTex will not operate without the Security Lock! Scanvec Garment Systems (SGS) will replace your CD if it is lost, but WILL NOT replace lost or stolen Security Lock. If the Security lock becomes defective it will be replaced, but only after it has been returned to SGS. If you must return the security lock, the package should be insured. CD The OptiTex Program Disk. Documentation OptiTex Manual and Lesson Plans Registration Before you begin, send in the Product Registration card to register yourself as an owner of OptiTex. This card can be faxed or mailed to the address on the card. As a registered owner, youâll be informed of updates, upgrades and training seminars; youâll be on the mailing list for technical bulletins and product information. Help Services Provided SGS offers extensive customer service. Below are the operational support services available to you as a Registered OptiTex user. Mark Manual4 Technical Support Our US and Canada Technical Support department will provide assistance for problems of a technical nature. If you are having problems printing or plotting, for example, technical support will assist you. When calling for technical support, please be at your computer with the following information: ⢠OptiTex Version Number. ⢠OptiTex Security Lock # (listed on the lock). ⢠Detailed description of the problem, including exact wording of any error messages. Technical Support offices USA Tel.: 610-521-5970 Toll free: (US & Canada) 877 RING OPTI Fax: 610-521-1564 ISRAEL Tel.: 972-3-904-9979 Fax: 972-3-904-2710 Internet Messages can be sent via Internet to our support at the following address: E-Mail Technical Support:
[email protected] E-Mail Sales & Marketing:
[email protected] Web Page http://www.optitex.com Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures 5 Installing OptiTex Before you run the installation program for OptiTex, make sure your computer meets the minimum requirements to run the software. OptiTex Requirements Pentium or better processor 16 MB of RAM Microsoft Windows ⢠95 Hard Drive with 150 MB of free disk space Microsoft mouse or other compatible pointing device SVGA 15ââ monitor running at resolution 800X600, 256 colors, 1 parallel port, 1 serial port Recommended Equipment Pentium II â 350 or better processor 64 MB of RAM Microsoft Windows ⢠95 or Windows 98 or Windows NT Hard Drive with 150 MB of free disk space Microsoft mouse or other compatible pointing device AGP display card with 4 MB of memory Mark Manual6 17ââ monitor running at resolution 1024X768, 256 colors, 1 parallel port, 2 serial ports USB port SGS recommends using a Bus mouse if you intend to install a serial plotter or digitizer, since most computers are only equipped with two serial outlets. In order to use OptiTex, you need to do the following: ⢠Attach the OptiTex Security. ⢠Install the OptiTex Software. ⢠Configure your Plotter. Attach the OptiTex Security Lock There are five steps, which must be performed in order to attach the OptiTex Security Lock. ⢠Turn your computer off. ⢠Remove any cable or Security Lock which may be connected to your printer (LPT1 â the printer port is a female slot at the rear panel of your computer). ⢠Plug the male side of the OptiTex Security Lock into the printer port (LPT1). ! Note: Before plugging in the Security Lock you may want to write down the serial number located on the plug. This number will be necessary when calling for Technical Support and is required on the Product Registration Card. Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures 7 ⢠Plug anything, which was previously attached to the printer into the back end of the OptiTex Security Lock. ! Note: If you have a printer connected to the back of the OptiTex Security Lock make sure the printer is properly grounded. If it is not grounded correctly, the printer can short out your Security Lock. Do not connect the Security Lock to an A/B switch box or a cable, as this also short out the Security Lock (you may find that it will work for a while, but it will eventually destroy the Security Lock). The OptiTex Security Lock MUST be plugged DIRECTLY into the printer port (LPT1). ! Note: SGS does not guarantee that its copy protection and software are compatible with all kind of computers. Install the OptiTex Software 1. Start Microsoft Windows 95. 2. Place the CD in the CD-ROM drive of your computer. 3. The installation screen will display on the screen automatically. 4. Select âInstall Optitex 8.0.â 5. In the first screen select the installation language. Click NEXT. 6. Select the Optitex language. ! Note: The installation will take few minutes to copy the necessary files to your hard drive. ⢠The destination directory dialog box will be displayed. The default installation path will be set to C:\Program files\Optitex8. Click Browse button to select a different path. Click Next. Mark Manual8 ⢠Select the options that you would like to have install and click next. The program will begin installing the files to the selected drive and directories. After the installation is complete, a dialog box will display thanking you for installing the latest version of SGS software. Click OK and icons will be placed on the desktop of your computer for OptiTex PDS and OptiTex Mark. To open PDS or Mark, double click on the correct icon. You must restart you computer after first OptiTex installation (no need to restart it if you upgrade the existing OptiTex software). Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures 9 Configuring OptiTex to Your Plotter There are several steps to configuring your plotter. You must set up your communication parameters, configure the plot manager, and use the plotter setup command in the File menu. You can use the plot manager of your choice. OptiTex supplies you with OutMan (output manager) which supports different standard and non-standard plotters as well as OCC. The OutMan uses Windows communication routines and has its own Queue of file to plot. Set Up Communication Parameters You must first set up the communication parameters for the Com port to which your plotter is connected (there is no need to configure parallel port). Refer to your plotterâs manual to find its particular communication parameters. ! Note: It is absolutely necessary to setup the communication parameters for the Com port to which your plotter is connected. Configuring the OutMan as the Output manger To configure OptiTex to your plotter, the OutMan must be loaded on the station connected to the plotter. This way all users can share the plotter. Do not load the Output manager on stations without a plotter connected. The OutMan installation will copy all relevant files to your disk and place the OutMan icon in your Startup group. OutMan displays a complete review of the file being plotted, including the amount of paper left on the roll and other useful information. You must perform the following steps for each plotter you will be using. Mark Manual10 ⢠On the station connected to the plotter, double click the OutMan icon. The OutMan dialog box will be displayed. ⢠In the Out Man dialog box select the Communication command in the Options menu. The Communication dialog box will then be displayed. ⢠Select the proper communication port and set the correct communication parameters for it. OutMan Dialog Box Stop Action Stop Action command is used to stop the current plot job. Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures 11 Exit Exit command is used to close the output manager. Communication Used to set up the port, baud rate, data bits, parity, stop bits, flow, and protocol. Working Units Allows you to choose the working unit of your choice: mm, cm, inches, or feet. Font Allows you to change the font size and type. About Displays information about the version of software. Mark Manual12 Configuring Output Control Center (OCC) as output manger The Output Control Center (OCC) is used to communicate with your plotter or cutter as well as manage all your plotting jobs. The OCC supports plotters in local computer or on any other computer on your network. OCC (Output Control Center) is a 32 Bit application, native to windows, and it's main usage is for arranging a queue to plotters. OCC can control all kind of output devices, regardless of how they are connected to your computer. You can use serial, parallel & network plotting with it at a great ease. The following document comes to explain to you how to use this application. Note that it's possible to set the OCC in the same way from our "Plot" dialog in OptiTex 8.0 The OCC user interface The Occ application is built mainly from two windows. The first one is the "Plotters and Queue window" and the second one is the "Jobs and Info. In queue" The Toolbar is made of buttons which are always the same. Make Job Ready Making a plot job ready, and sending to plot Hold Job Leaves the job in the queue in order to plot it later. Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures 13 Restart Job Use this button to restart a stuck job or a job you want to re-print it. You can also "restart" jobs that are already done and are in the done folder of the selected plotter. Delete Job Removes the plot job from the queue. Move Up Move the job one level up in the queue. Move Down Move the job one level down in the queue. Move to Top Move the job to the top of the list. Move to Bottom Move the job to the bottom of the list. Pause Job Pausing the plot job, may be resume at any time. Abort Job Aborts the plotting job, but leaves it on the queue. Mark Manual14 Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures 15 Setting Up a Plotter 7. Open the OCC and choose "setup -> Plotters" from the file menu. ⢠The âPlotter Setupâ dialog appears: Press the "ADD" button, to add a new plotter Choose the way the plotter is connected and press "Next" If your plotter is connected directly to your computer, choose "My computer" ⢠And if it's a plotter that's connected to another computer on your network, choose "Network computer". Choose the way the plotter is set. Choose the port (LPT,COM or File), ⢠Choose if you want to print to Lectra, Gerber or Standad plotting protocol, and choose the data bits, stop bits, parity and baud rate as they are in your plotter's manual. In your plotter manual you should also have the switches (communication parameters) for your specific plotter. ⢠After setting up everything press on the "Next" button. ⢠In the plotter name dialog, write the name of your plotter (or any name you want) and choose a path where you want to keep your queue files (file to plot), and then press on Finish. ⢠If you want other people on your network to be able to plot with your plotter, you have check the "Shared Plotter" box. Mark Manual16 In the new window you can see your plotters, and the name of the computer that they are connected to. On the lower part of this window, you can see which plotter is the Default one, If you want to change the default plotter, all you have to do is to click once on the plotter you want to make as default and then press on the "set Default" button. When you're satisfied with your plotter settings press the "Close" button, to get into the main window of the OCC application again. Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 17 Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars The Tools Tools are small icons or pictures that represent different features within the software. Tools are displayed across the top of the screen in bars (rows) located below the pull down menus and above the piece bar. There are seven different Toolbars in the MARK software: The System Toolbar: The Marker Toolbar: The Piece Toolbar: The Alignment Toolbar: Mark Manual18 The Placement Toolbar: The Group Toolbar: The General Toolbar: Toolbars may be viewed on the screen, or they may be hidden from view. When all Toolbars are displayed, the size of the working area is reduced. To control the display of Toolbars on the screen, use the Toolbars command in the Display menu. To display a particular Toolbar on the screen, place a check mark next to the name of the Toolbar. To hide a particular Toolbar, uncheck the name of the Toolbar. To check or uncheck a selection, click on the name of the Toolbar in the Toolbar Menu. Toolbars toggle from on to off each time the mouse clicks on the name of the Toolbar. To Customize a Toolbar: 1. From the View menu, select Tool Bars. 1. Click on Customize. 2. Click on New. Name the new toolbar. Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 19 3. Click OK. The toolbar will display under the Toolbars tab and on the working screen. 4. Select the Tools tab. On the right, the buttons are displayed for the highlighted toolbar on the left. 5. Select the button to be placed in the new toolbar. A description of that button will display at the bottom of the dialog box. 6. Click and drag the button from the dialog box to the new toolbar on the working screen. 7. Lift the mouse button to drop the button into the toolbar. Repeat this until all desired buttons are placed in the toolbar. 8. Click OK. To Reset a Toolbar: Resetting a toolbar replaces any buttons that were taken out of a default toolbar. 2. From the View menu, select Tool Bars. 3. Highlight the desired toolbar. 4. Click Reset. 5. Click Close. Engaging a Tool Clicking once on the tool activates most tools. The cursor changes from the normal pointer (an arrow) to another type of pointer that coincides with the selected tool. For example, when the Rotate tool is activated, the normal Mark Manual20 pointer turns into a curved arrow. The curved arrow reminds the user that the rotate feature is currently activated. Disengaging a Tool Returning to the normal arrow pointer disengages a tool. To return to the normal arrow pointer, either click on the tool that looks like an arrow, or click the right mouse button, and select the first option in the pop up menu, âSelect Toolâ using the left mouse button. Selecting another tool from one of the Toolbars also disengages tools currently in use. Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 21 System Toolbar Release Tool The Release tool (sometimes called the Select or the Arrow tool) is the default tool used in the Mark software. This tool is used to select pieces, points, and line segments. ! Note: To access the Release tool without clicking on the Release icon, click the right mouse button one time. With the left button, select the Select tool from the pop-up menu. New Use the new tool to start a new marker (DSP) file. A DSP file contains all the pieces necessary to make one complete marker layout. When the New tool is selected, the Marker Definition dialog box displays by default. Enter specific marker area information for the new marker and click Ok. Pattern files are loaded by using Open Style Files in the File Menu. ! Note: Refer to the File Chapter for more information. Mark Manual22 Open The Open tool opens an existing SGS Marker file ! Note: SGS marker files have the extension, .DSP. ! Note: The last directory where marker files have been saved becomes the default directory for the Open and Save commands. Use the Browse button to select a different directory. Save The Save tool saves the file displayed on screen to the current path under the current name, replacing the old file. If a new file has been created, but the new file has not been previously saved, a dialog box prompts for a file name to be entered. ! Note: The DSP extension is added to the file name automatically. ! Note: The last directory where marker files have been saved becomes the default directory for the Open and Save commands. Use the Browse button to select a different directory. ! Note: Refer to the File Chapter for more information. Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 23 Print Use the Print Tool to activate the Print dialog box. Refer to the File Chapter for in depth information. Plot Use the Plot Tool to activate the Plot dialog box. Refer to the File Chapter for in depth information. About Choose the About OptiTex Mark tool to find the version of OptiTex Mark that is currently being used. This information is necessary when contacting Technical Support for help with the SGS software. Help Tool Use the Help tool to get information about any item or feature in the SGS software. Select the Help tool and then click on any item on the screen to get information about the selected item. Information regarding the selected item displays on the screen. Mark Manual24 Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 25 Stop Auto Nest When the automatic process begins, a clock icon will be displayed indicating that automatic placement is in process. To stop the Auto-nesting procedure, click the Stop icon. The Nesting process will be halted and only those pieces already nested will stay on the marker. The Auto-nesting procedure stops only after the current piece is placed on the marker. In cases where the current piece is complicated, or the solution task is very large, it may take some time to stop the Auto-nesting procedure. Once the Auto-nesting procedure has been halted the user may change the Piece Attributes, move the nested pieces and place new pieces. The new attributes will be taken into account when the Auto-nesting procedure is resumed. Select Continue from the Nesting menu to resume the nesting in progress. Redraw Marker Pressing the Redraw Icon refreshes the marker area. Mark Manual26 Marker Toolbar View All Pieces A single-click on the View All Pieces icon will reset the screen to Full scale. Zoom Select the Zoom In tool to enlarge a specific area. The Zoom limitations are set by the current application and by Windows. To Zoom: 9. Click the Zoom tool. 10. Click and drag a rectangle around the area to Zoom upon Unzoom A single-click on the Unzoom icon will reset the screen to the previous scale. Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 27 View All Marker A single click on the View All Marker icon displays the total marker area scaled to fit on the screen. Undo Use the Undo tool to reverse the most recent action performed in the marker file. The Undo tool may be selected up to 20 times undoing the 20 most recent operations, back to adding a piece to the marker area. Undo does not work to undo the loading of the file. Redo Use the Redo tool to inverse the most recent action. This command cancels the last 20 operations, one at a time. Measure Select the Measure tool to measure distances between any two points. The points can be vertical, horizontal or diagonal. Mark Manual28 To Measure 6. Click the Measure tool. 7. Click at the location you would like to begin the measurement and drag to the location you want to end the measurement. 8. The DX distance, DY distance, and the actual distance will be displayed along the bottom of the screen. Notch This tool adds, deletes, or edits a notch or button on pattern pieces. To Add a Notch: 9. Click the Notch tool. 10. Click at the location on the piece to add the notch. The Edit Notch dialog box is displayed. 11. Select the desired Notch Attributes. 12. Click OK. To Delete a Notch: 11. Click the Notch tool. 13. Click the notch to delete. The Edit Notch dialog box is displayed. 14. Click Delete. Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 29 To Edit a Notch: 12. Click the Notch tool. 13. Click the notch to edit. The Edit Notch dialog box is displayed. 14. Select the desired notch attributes. 15. Click OK. Edit Notch Dialog Box: Mark Manual30 Notch Type There are six types of notches. Define the type of notch to cut on the piece. The T and I notch will both be cut as a slit notch on a numerically controlled (NC) cutter. Mode When using a numerically controlled (NC) cutter, the user can define whether the notch to be drawn, cut, or punched. Call the Fax Back System to learn how to set the options for the various NC Cutters. The result of each attribute is different depending on the type of output machine. Some machines can produce a single notch with different tools: Pen, Knife or a Special Punch tool. On different machines the knives could be different: Circular, Tangential or Jig knives. Each machine has its own advantages and limitations. Relative Angle This option allows you to change the angle of the notch. For example, if you would like the V notch to point out instead of in, apply a 180 degree angle to the V notch. Depth This option allows you to change the depth of the notch. Width This option allows you to change the width of the notch. Usually the width twice the depth. Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 31 Stripe Adjust Number and method This option is used to match a piece on the notch to a stripe or plaid line. For more information, see the Stripes and Relate Piece to Stripes commands in the Marker Menu. Operation Stop If you have a numerically controlled (NC) cutter, this option sets the cutter to stop cutting the notch Before with confirmation, after with confirmation, before (without a confirmation), After (without a confirmation), or Not Stop (no stop at all). To Add a Button: 16. Click the Notch tool. 17. Click at the location you would like to add the button. The Edit Button dialog box is displayed. 18. Select the desired Button Attributes. 19. Click OK. To Delete a Button: 20. Click the Notch tool. 21. Click the button you would like to delete. The Edit Button dialog box is displayed. 22. Click Delete. Mark Manual32 To Edit a Button: 23. Click the Notch tool. 24. Click the button you would like to edit. The Edit Button dialog box is displayed. 25. Select the desired button attributes. 26. Click OK. Edit Button Dialog Box: Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 33 Mode If you have a numerically controlled (NC) cutter, you can define whether you would like the button to be drawn, cut, or drilled. Call the Fax Back System to learn how to set the options for the various NC Cutters. The result of each attribute is different depending on the type of output machine. Some machines can produce a single button with different tools: Pen, Knife or a Special Drill tool. On different machines you might find different knives: Circular, Tangential or Jig knives. Each one itâs their own advantages and limitations. Radius This area is used to define the size of the button to be cut. Stripe Adjust Number This option is used to match a piece on the notch to a stripe or plaid line. For more information, see the Stripes and Relate Piece to Stripes commands in the Marker Menu. Text The Text tool changes the location, size, and angle of the Piece Description information. The Piece Description information is determined by the Display Pieces on Marker option in the Options menu. The Text also allows you to add or edit internal text on a piece. The internal text and piece description information in the Internal Text Dialog box is displayed to scale. Mark Manual34 To Edit Piece Description Information: 27. Click the Text tool. 28. Click the cursor on the piece to edit. The Internal Text dialog box is displayed. 29. Check Piece Description field. The Piece Description is displayed in the Text field. ! Note: If you would like the changes to occur on the selected size only, disable the All Sizes field. 15. Make the changes. 16. Click OK. To Add Internal Text to a Piece: 30. Click the Text tool. 31. Click the cursor on the piece to edit. The Internal Text dialog box is displayed. 32. Type the text that you would like to add in the Text box. ! Note: If you would like the changes to occur on the selected size only, disable the All Sizes field. 17. Make the desired changes. 18. Click OK. Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 35 To Edit Internal Text On a Piece: 33. Click the Text tool. 34. Click the cursor toward the front of the text that you would like to change. The Internal Text dialog box is displayed with the text in the Text box. ! Note: If you would like the changes to occur on the selected size only, disable the All Sizes field. 19. Make the desired changes. 20. Click OK Internal Text Dialog Box: Text Editor This box displays the text to edit. Mark Manual36 Text Parameters The Size of font and base angle of the selected text can be changed. The default text size for the size name and description is a minimum of 1 cm and 1 mm respectively. The Piece Description text can be changed using the Global Info command in the Piece menu. Apply to All Sizes When this option is enabled, the text will be changed or added on all sizes. When it is disabled, the text will be changed or added only to the selected size. Show Cut/Plot Order The Cut/Plot Ordering displays the order in which the pattern pieces will be cut or plotted. Double click the right mouse button on a blank area of the marker to check and uncheck this option. The Cut/Plot Order can be changed using the Optimize Cutting Order and Selected Piece Cutting Order commands in the Marker menu. Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 37 Left Adjust Left Adjust places pieces in blank areas of the marker instead of using the manual dragging and dropping technique. Left Adjust enables the shoot operation usually done with the right mouse button to be done using the LEFT mouse button. This option takes into consideration all of the previously specified options like rotating, mirroring and so on. The size, position and number of angles a piece has contribute to the amount of time it takes to Adjust the piece on screen. Piece Toolbar Adjust Left (Alt+4) The Adjust Left arrow places and moves the selected piece(s) in the left direction until the piece(s) hits another contour. ! Note: The Alt+4 shortcut only works with the numeric keypad. ! Note: The arrows on the keyboard will move the piece in the selected direction 10 pixels at a time. Mark Manual38 Adjust Right (Alt+6) The Adjust Right arrow places and moves the selected piece(s) in the right direction until the piece(s) hits another contour. ! Note: The Alt+6 shortcut only works with the numeric keypad. ! Note: The arrows on the keyboard will move the piece in the selected direction 10 pixels at a time. Adjust Down (Alt+2) The Adjust Down arrow places and moves the selected piece(s) in the down direction until the piece(s) hits another contour. ! Note: The Alt+2 shortcut only works with the numeric keypad. ! Note: The arrows on the keyboard will move the piece in the selected direction 10 pixels at a time. Adjust Up (Alt+8) The Adjust Up arrow places and moves the selected piece(s) in the up direction until the piece(s) hits another contour. Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 39 ! Note: The Alt+8 shortcut only works with the numeric keypad. ! Note: The arrows on the keyboard will move the piece in the selected direction 10 pixels at a time. Flip Y The Flip Y tool allows the pattern piece to flip in the Y direction on the marker area. This tool will not flip the piece if a one-way direction has been assigned or flipping has not been permitted in the Piece Info. Box under the Piece Menu. Flip X The Flip X tool allows the pattern piece to flip in the X direction on the marker area. Rotate by 90 Degrees The Rotate by 90 Degrees rotates the selected piece(s) counter-clockwise each time it is selected. If the Limit Rotation command (in the Options menu) is enabled, the direction limits must allow the piece to rotate 90 degrees for the rotation to take place. Mark Manual40 Rotate By 180 Degrees The Rotate by 180 Degrees rotates the selected piece(s) counter-clockwise each time it is selected. If the Limit Rotation command (in the Options menu) is enabled, the direction limits must allow the piece to rotate 180 degrees for the rotation to take place. Rotate by Center The Rotate from Center tool allows a selected piece(s) to be rotated from a center point with the mouse. If the Limit Rotation command (in the Options menu) is enabled, the direction limits must allow the piece to rotate for the rotation to take place. If the Round after Rotation option in the Options menu is enabled, the piece will snap to the closest 90-degree angle (within 8 degrees). To Rotate from the Center of the Selected Piece: 35. Click the Rotate from Center tool. 36. Click the mouse on the desired piece and move the mouse in a circle. The piece will rotate on a pivot point that is located in the center of the selected piece. Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 41 Rotate Piece The Rotate from Specific Point tool allows a selected piece(s) to be rotated with the mouse. If the Limit Rotation command (in the Options menu) is enabled, the direction limits must allow the piece to rotate for the rotation to take place. If the Round after Rotation option in the Options menu is enabled, the piece will snap to the closest 90-degree angle (within 8 degrees). To Rotate from a Specific Point On the Selected Piece(s): 37. Click the Rotate from Specific Point tool. 38. Click the mouse on the desired pivot point on the piece, moves the mouse in a circle. The piece will rotate from the exact point selected. Adjust Adjust places pieces in blank areas of the marker instead of using the manual dragging and dropping technique. This option takes into consideration all of the previously specified options like rotating, mirroring and so on. The size, position and number of angles a piece has contribute to the amount of time it takes to Adjust the piece on screen. To Adjust To the Nearest Piece Or Boundary: 39. Click the Adjust tool. (The Adjust tool remains enabled until Adjust Rotate or Insert to Hole tool is selected.) Mark Manual42 40. Click the right mouse button on the piece(s) to Adjust. ! Tip: To select multiple pieces, click and drag a box around the desired pieces, or click on the first piece and press and hold the Shift key to add additional pieces to the group. 21. Drag the cursor to the area you would like the piece to be placed. The piece will move to the desired location and âbumpâ against the first piece or marker boundary it comes to. Adjust Rotate The Adjust Rotate tool is similar to the Adjust tool. It Adjust Rotate the piece to get a tighter marker. If the Limit Rotation command in the Options menu is enabled, the Rotation Limits must also be defined in the Piece Info Dialog box. The size, position and number of angles a piece has contribute to the amount of time it takes to Adjust the piece on screen. To Adjust Rotate to the Nearest Piece or boundary: 41. Click the Adjust Rotate tool. 42. Click and drag the right mouse button on the selected piece(s) you wish to Adjust Rotate. 43. Drag the cursor to the area you would like the piece to be placed. Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 43 Insert to Hole The Insert to Hole tool is similar to the Adjust Rotate tool. It Jumps over placed pieces and Rotates the piece to get a tighter marker. If the Limit Rotation command in the Options menu is enabled, the Rotation Limits must also be defined in the Piece Info Dialog box. The size, position and number of angles a piece has contribute to the amount of time it takes to Jump the piece on screen. Mark Manual44 To Insert to Hole: 44. Click the Insert to Hole tool. 45. Click and drag the right mouse button on the selected piece(s) you wish to Insert to Hole. 46. Drag the cursor to the area you would like the piece to be placed. Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 45 Alignment Toolbar The Alignment Tools enable several pieces to align as a group on the marker. Align Center The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the marker area. ⢠Drag a box around the pieces to align. Or click on the pieces to align while holding the Ctrl key. ⢠Click the Align Center icon. ! Note: Pieces that are beside each other on the marker will overlap when aligned. Align Left The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece closest to the markerâs left boundary. ⢠Drag a box around the pieces to align. Or click on the pieces to align while holding the Ctrl key. ⢠Click the Align Left icon. Mark Manual46 ! Note: Pieces that are beside each other on the marker will overlap when aligned. Align Right The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece closest to the markerâs right boundary. ⢠Drag a box around the pieces to align. Or click on the pieces to align while holding the Ctrl key. ⢠Click the Align Right icon ! Note: Pieces that are beside each other on the marker will overlap when aligned. Align to Top The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece closest to the top of the marker area. ⢠Drag a box around the pieces to align. Or click on the pieces to align while holding the Ctrl key. ⢠Click the Align Left icon. Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 47 Align to Bottom The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece closest to the bottom of the marker area. ⢠Drag a box around the pieces to align. Or click on the pieces to align while holding the Ctrl key. ⢠Click the Align Left icon. Align Horizontally The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece closest to the Left boundary of the marker area. ⢠Drag a box around the pieces to align. Or click on the pieces to align while holding the Ctrl key. ⢠Click the Align Left icon. Align Vertically The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece closest to the Left boundary of the marker area. Mark Manual48 ⢠Drag a box around the pieces to align. Or click on the pieces to align while holding the Ctrl key. ⢠Click the Align Left icon. Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 49 Placement Toolbar: Place (CTRL+P) Use this command to place the selected piece or pieces on the marker area. ⢠Hold down the Shift key, select the pieces you wish to place. ⢠Select Place Selected Pieces/Place or select CTRL+P ! Note: There is a difference between placing the pieces with CTRL+P command and placing the pieces with the Double Click command. Place One Bundle Use this command to place one set or bundle of the selected piece or pieces onto the marker area. ⢠Hold down the Shift key, select the pieces you wish to place. ⢠Select Place Selected Pieces/Place One Set or select CTRL+SHIFT+P Mark Manual50 Place All Use this command to place all of the selected pieces onto the selected area. ⢠Hold down the Shift key, select the pieces you wish to place. ⢠Select Place Selected Pieces/Place All or select CTRL+SHIFT+ALT+P Place Folded Left This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the left edge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Left can only be used on Faced or Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the right/left. ⢠In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold along the left boundary of the marker. ⢠Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Folded Left from the Marker menu. The piece will be placed along the left boundary. ⢠OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in step number two, place your cursor in the desired location on the left edge of the marker boundary, hold down the L key and double click the left mouse button. The piece will be placed along the left boundary of the marker. Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 51 ! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move the pieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simply return the piece to the Piece Display Bar. ! Tip: To define a marker as Faced or Folded refer to the MARKER DEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece with folding allowed refers to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands in the Piece menu. Place Folded Right This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the right edge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Right can only be used on Faced or Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the right/left. ⢠In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold along the right boundary of the marker. ⢠Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Folded Right from the Marker menu. The piece will be placed along the right boundary. ⢠OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in step number two, place your cursor in the desired location on the right edge of the marker boundary, hold down the R key and double click the left mouse button. The piece will be placed along the right boundary of the marker. ! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move the pieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simply return the piece to the Piece Display Bar. Mark Manual52 ! Tip: To define a marker as Faced or Folded refer to the MARKER DEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece with folding allowed refers to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands in the Piece menu. Place Folded Up This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the upper edge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Up can only be used on Tubular or Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the up/down. ⢠In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold along the upper boundary of the marker. ⢠Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Folded Up from the Marker menu. The piece will be placed along the upper boundary. ⢠OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in step number two, place your cursor in the desired location on the upper edge of the marker boundary, hold down the U key and double click the left mouse button. The piece will be placed along the upper boundary of the marker. ! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move the pieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simpily return the piece to the Piece Display Bar. ! Tip: To define a marker as Tubular or Folded refer to the MARKER DEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece with folding allowed refers to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands in the Piece menu. Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 53 Place Folded Down This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the lower edge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Down can only be used on Tubular or Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the up/down. ⢠In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold along the lower boundary of the marker. ⢠Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Folded Down from the Marker menu. The piece will be placed along the lower boundary. ⢠OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in step number two, place your cursor in the desired location on the lower edge of the marker boundary, hold down the D key and double click the left mouse button. The piece will be placed along the lower boundary of the marker. ! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move the pieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simply return the piece to the Piece Display Bar. ! Tip: To define a marker as Tubular or Folded refer to the MARKER DEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece with folding allowed refers to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands in the Piece menu. Mark Manual54 Place Left Up This command is used to fold a piece in quarters and place it in the upper left corner of the marker boundary. Place Left Up can only be used on Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the up/down and left/right. In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold into quarters and place in the upper left corner of the marker boundary. Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Left Up from the Marker menu. The piece will be placed in the upper left corner of the marker boundary. OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in step number two, place your cursor in the upper left corner of the marker boundary, hold down the Home key (located on the numeric keypad) and double click the left mouse button. The piece will be placed in the upper left corner of the marker boundary. ! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move the pieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simply return the piece to the Piece Display Bar. ! Tip: To define a marker as Tubular or Folded refer to the MARKER DEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece with folding allowed refer to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands in the Piece menu. Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 55 Place Left Down This command is used to fold a piece in quarters and place it in the lower left corner of the marker boundary. Place Left Down can only be used on Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the up/down and left/right. In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold into quarters and place in the lower left corner of the marker boundary. Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Left Up from the Marker menu. The piece will be placed in the lower left corner of the marker boundary. OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in step number two, place your cursor in the lower left corner of the marker boundary, hold down the End key (located on the numeric keypad) and double click the left mouse button. The piece will be placed in the lower left corner of the marker boundary. ! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move the pieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simply return the piece to the Piece Display Bar. ! Tip: To define a marker as Tubular or Folded refer to the MARKER DEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece with folding allowed refers to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands in the Piece menu. Mark Manual56 Place Right Up This command is used to fold a piece in quarters and place it in the upper right corner of the marker boundary. Place Right Up can only be used on Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the up/down and left/right. ⢠In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold into quarters and place in the upper right corner of the marker boundary. ⢠Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Right Up from the Marker menu. The piece will be placed in the upper right corner of the marker boundary. ⢠OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in step number two, place your cursor in the upper right corner of the marker boundary, hold down the Page UP key (located on the numeric keypad) and double click the left mouse button. The piece will be placed in the upper right corner of the marker boundary. ! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move the pieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simply return the piece to the Piece Display Bar. ! Tip: To define a marker as Tubular or Folded refer to the MARKER DEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece with folding allowed refers to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands in the Piece menu. Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 57 Place Right Down This command is used to fold a piece in quarters and place it in the lower right corner of the marker boundary. Place Right Down can only be used on Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the up/down and left/right. In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold into quarters and place in the lower right corner of the marker boundary. Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Right Down from the Marker menu. The piece will be placed in the lower right corner of the marker boundary. OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in step number two, place your cursor in the lower right corner of the marker boundary, hold down the Page Down key (located on the numeric keypad) and double click the left mouse button. The piece will be placed in the lower right corner of the marker boundary. ! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move the pieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simply return the piece to the Piece Display Bar. ! Tip: To define a marker as Tubular or Folded refer to the MARKER DEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece with folding allowed refers to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands in the Piece menu. Mark Manual58 Group Toolbar: Keep This command will group selected pieces together and allow for placement of additional pieces exactly the same as the âkeptâ group. This option is helpful when nesting pieces according to sets. To Keep a Group ⢠Create a group. ⢠From the GROUPING menu choose KEEP. The grouped pieces will be displayed with a dashed line around them, and the pieces will also be displayed in their own group on the Piece Display Bar. This group can be placed and manipulated on the marker as if it were a single piece. ! Tip: After placing a âkeptâ group, the pieces will move as a group until a different piece is selected or another group is placed. Ungroup Choose the Ungroup command to release âkeptâ pieces. Once the Ungroup command is selected, the group will no longer be displayed in the Piece Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 59 Display Bar. The individual pieces will remain in their original Piece Display Boxes. Fix on Marker Select the Fix On Marker command to permanently group pieces. The pieces will appear to be âfrozenâ in the selected group until they are released with one of the Unfix commands. Anytime any part of the fixed group is selected, the whole group will be highlighted and will move as a single object. To Fix a Group on the Marker ⢠Create a group. ⢠From the GROUPING menu choose FIX ON MARKER Unfix Selected All pieces that were in the selected group will be released and can be placed individually. To Unfix a Selected Group on the Marker: Select the group, groups you want to release. From the GROUPING menu choose UNFIX SELECTED Mark Manual60 Unfix All Select the Unfix All command to release the entire âfixedâ group of pieces. All âfixedâ groups will be released and the pieces will move individually. Stripe Adjust Group This command is used to ensure that if piece is re-positioned within the floral, stripe, or plaid marker area, the piece will match to the other placed pieces. To Create a Stripe Adjust Group: ⢠Position the pieces that relate to one another on the marker area. ⢠Select the group of pieces. ⢠From the GROUPING menu choose Stripe Adjust Group. If any of the Stripe Adjust Group pieces are moved, the moved piece will always snap to a similar location Rectangular Block Fuse This tool is used to create separate Fusing (Cutting) zones. It enables to eliminate certain zones on the marker from being cut. To Create Rectangular Block Fuse ⢠Click and drag a box around the area you want to create a block fuse from. Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 61 ⢠Choose from âGroupingâ menu âBlock Fuseâ option. Only pieces that were marked entirely in the box would be included in the block. ! Note: Block fuse will be disabled to a folded piece. A âAll nested piecesâ will plot all the pieces with the drawn blocks. A âMarker without blocksâ will plot the marker without the blocks. A âMarker with block spacesâ will plot the marker with block spaces. âContain all blocksâ will plot only the contents of the blocks. Thrifty Block Fuse This feature enables the user to create a "thrifty" block fusing as opposed to a rectangle block fusing; this limits fabric waste and the user can still create a block fusing on selected pieces. To Create Thrifty Block Fuse: ⢠Click and drag a box around the area you want to create a thrifty block fuse from. ⢠Choose from âGroupingâ menu âThrifty Fuseâ option. Only pieces that were marked entirely in the box would be included in the block. Mark Manual62 ! Note: Thrifty fuse will be disabled to a folded piece. Select Whole Bundle This command enables the user to select a complete bundle by selecting any piece within the bundle Unify Pieces Orientation This command enables the user to unify piece orientations within bundle according to one selected piece orientation within the bundle. Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 63 General Toolbar Piece Info (Ctrl+I) This command is used to verify, update and change all text and parameters of the selected piece and size. The Piece Information includes the style and piece name, code, description, number of copies and current plies, remainders, buffering information, area and perimeter measurements, priority in auto nesting, orientation of the piece, rotation limits, locked piece and flipping information. All Sizes Info This option enables you to simultaneously set attributes for all sizes of a selected piece. To Set All Sizes Info: ⢠From the PIECE menu choose ALL SIZES INFO. The All Sizes Information dialog box will be displayed. ⢠Enter the desired values. ⢠Click Apply next to each changed value. Mark Manual64 Global Info The Global Info controls information settings for all sizes or specific sizes on all pieces or specific pieces in the marker. ! Tip: The Global Info command enables you to manipulate piece(s) attributes in the size level. You may also see the net weight and the net area of a piece, and calculate gross values per size using the Optimum Area option in the Marker menu. To Set Global Info for all Sizes on All Pieces: ⢠From the PIECE menu choose GLOBAL INFO.... The Global Pieces Info dialog box will be displayed. ⢠Change the value(s) of the chosen attribute(s). ⢠Click Apply to each changed value. To Specify Settings For the Selected Size on Selected Pieces ⢠Hold down the Shift key and select the pieces of your choice in the Piece Display Bar. ⢠In the Global Info dialog box, enable the Settings For Selected Pieces Only and the Settings for Selected Sizes Only options. ⢠Select the size for which you want to assign a setting. ⢠Enter the specifications for that size. Be sure to select SET after changing each specification/option. Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 65 ⢠Continue selecting the sizes you want to change, or click CLOSE to exit the Global Information dialog box. Marker Definitions (Ctrl+M) Use this command to specify or change options related to the current marker, including the marker size, selvages and the fabric spreading method. To Apply Marker Definitions: ⢠From the MARKER menu choose MARKER DEFINITIONS. The Marker Definitions dialog box will be displayed. ⢠Select the desired options. ⢠Enter the desired information. ⢠Click OK. Display Pieces on Marker Select the Display Pieces on Marker command to determine the specific information that will be displayed on screen and output with the file. Since most of the output options will perform the output according to the information displayed on screen (WYSIWYG, What You See Is What You Get), it is important to control all of the different elements. Mark Manual66 To Display Pieces on Marker: ⢠From the OPTIONS menu choose DISPLAY PIECES ON MARKER.... The Display Pieces on Marker dialog box will be displayed. ⢠Select the desired options. ⢠Click OK. The selected information will be displayed on screen and output with the file ! Note: If there is an x in the box to the left of the option, it is selected and will be displayed on screen and will output with the file. Click once to place an x or select the option, click again to remove it. Placement on Marker The âPlacement on markerâ gives you the location of your selected piece by coordinates: In the x description there are: left, center and right, you can move your piece Horizontally by entering a new coordinate value to one of the three windows. In the y description there are: top, center and bottom, you can move your piece Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 67 Vertically by entering a new coordinate value to one of the three windows. Stripe Definition This command is used to define stripes, plaids, or floral prints on the marker, simulating a repeated design. The Stripe Definition option is used when you are marking material with a special design that must appear on the piece in a specific place. It ensures that your piece will be cut correctly with the repeated design. ! Note: The auto-nesting procedure does not take the Stripe Definition option into account. To Define Stripes: ⢠From the MARKER menu choose STRIPE DEFINITION... The Stripes Definitions dialog box will be displayed. ⢠Verify or change the selected parameters. ⢠Click OK. ! Note: Select the Hide Stripes option in the Options menu to display only a fraction of the horizontal and vertical lines around the border of the marker. For some this is more visually appealing and easier to work with. To Add or Edit Stripe Adjust Notches or Buttons: Decide which pieces in your DSN file match. Mark the match point on the pieces with notches or buttons. Mark Manual68 The Notches and Buttons must be assigned Stripe Adjust numbers. To ensure that all future markers receive the same stripes adjust numbers, it is best to make the notch and button edits in OptiGrade. If the attributes were not specified with OptiGrade, you can use the Notch icon to edit the stripe adjust number in OptiMark. Numbers 1 through 4 can be used for stripe adjust numbers. The match points that line up must be assigned the same stripe adjust number and notch or button type. For example, if the side seams of the front and back should line up, add the same type of notch on both pieces in the matching location, and assign a stripe adjust number of one. If the front has a patch pocket that lines up on the right side, add a button to the front and to the pocket, and assign a stripe adjust number of one or two. When the first piece is placed in the marker, the second piece will look at the first piece to determine where it needs to be located. All pieces placed on the marker that have the same notch number will be placed at the same coordinates of each repeated stripe as the first piece. When stripe adjust according to sets is disabled, the next bundle placed will match in the same way that the previous bundle of the same size matched. When stripe adjust according to sets in enabled, the next bundle placed will match any way that the user requests. If stripe adjust according to sets in enabled and the first bundle placed was related to Stripes, the next bundle placed will match in the same way that the previous bundle of the same size matched. You cannot have several like notches with the same stripe numbers on the same piece. You can have different notches (V, Uâs etc.) with the same stripe numbers on the same piece. Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 69 Note: Matching points can also be defined using the Fabric and Stripes command in OptiGrade. Note: If you would like the stripe adjust point (notch or button) to match to a particular stripe junction, follow the To Relate Pieces (With Stripe Adjust Notches Or Buttons) To A Stripe instructions later in this chapter. Detect Intersections When this option is disabled, the marker will be plotted exactly as it appears on the screen. When this option is enabled, OptiMark will check the marker for overlapping pieces. A message will be displayed if any are found. AutoNesting Setup The âAuto Nest Setupâ enables you to select one way of nesting option from several options. It is also possible to create a list of markers to nest and test the results with different material width. A comparison table will be created for verification purposes. The Standard is a more simple but yet sophisticated way of nesting with two options: âQuickâ (when the Quick is marked) and slower one. The slower way will bring better results but will take longer time. Nest++ is an optional add-on application to OptiTex Mark with fantastic results. The efficiency is based on the duration that the automatic algorithm will run. The average time needed to get a good nest should last about 15 Mark Manual70 minutes for a marker with 50 to 80 pieces. A good nesting can be reached also after 2 or 3 minutes. Chapter 3: File Menu 71 Chapter 3: File Menu The File menu includes commands that enable you to Open, Save, Print, Plot, Import and Export files. From the File menu you will control most of your input and output options. To select one of the File commands, choose the command from the file menu, press the Shortcut Key (listed in parentheses), or click the icon. New (Ctrl+N) This command resets the screen and clears all current pieces and marker data from memory. It is used to create a new marker file. To Create a New File: From the File Menu select New or press Ctrl+N. If there is a file currently open, a dialog box will be displayed asking you to save the current file or cancel the command. An empty OptiTex Mark screen and the Marker Definitions dialog box will be displayed. See the Marker menu for more information on the Marker Definitions dialog box. Open Marker File (Ctrl + O) Select Open Marker File from the File Menu to open an existing Marker file. A Marker file has a DSP extension, which stands for Display File. A Marker file is usually based on Style (DSN) files, which comes from OptiTex PDS or grading application. Another sources for markers are those that are imported from other CAD/CAM applications. The Marker File can consist of one or more DSN or imported files and can contain both placed and unplaced pieces. Mark Manuel72 When opening a Marker file, you can enable a verification option from the âPreferenceâ command list, which is called: âCheck style file before openingâ. This option verifies that the original source design (DSN) file used to create the current Marker file didnât change in the meantime, and that it still exists in the same place. If something did change, there will be an error message. OptiTex Mark remembers the last directory where you have saved your DSN or DSP files, and it will become the default drive for opening and saving all other files. Open Marker Dialog Box: Open a Marker File from the Current Directory: ⢠From the File Menu select Open Marker File or press CTRL + O. The Open Marker File dialog box is displayed. ⢠Select the desired DSP file from the File Name list box. ⢠Press Enter or click OPEN. Chapter 3: File Menu 73 ! Tip: If you double click (press left mouse button twice quickly) on a file name, OptiTex Mark will select the file and open it. Open a Marker File From Another Directory: ⢠From the File Menu select Open Marker File or press CTRL + O. The Open Marker File dialog box is displayed. ⢠From the Look In list, double click the first option (usually C:\). A list of directories is displayed. ⢠Double click the desired directory. A list of DSP files will be displayed in the File Name List Box (if any exist). ⢠Select the desired file from the File Name List box. ⢠Click OK. ! Note: On Windows platforms, you can see Marker Preview on the right hand side of the Open Marker dialog box Merge Several Markers This function merges two markers side by side or one over the other. The default is side by side. To select Merge Above, select Preferences from the Options Menu and enable Merge Marker Above to the Current. ! Note: If the width and number of layers are not identical in the two marker files, OptiTex Mark determines and sets the values as follows: ⢠OptiTex Mark selects the wider value between the loaded markers. ⢠OptiTex Mark selects the current number of layers (not the number in the file you are loading). Mark Manuel74 Prepare both markers separately on their actual Marker size and by using the Merge Few Markers command, the second Marker will be added to the first. The second Marker will merge at the end of the first one. To Merge Marker Files: ⢠From the File Menu choose Merge Few Markers. The Open Marker File dialog box is displayed. ⢠Select the desired DSP file from the File Name list box. ! Tip: Double click the file name to quickly open it. ⢠Click OK. The selected maker will be added to the end of your open Marker file. ! Tip: By default the merged marker will be placed to the right of the open marker. If you want the merged marker to be above, go to the âPreferenceâ command under âOptions Menuâ and enable âMerge Marker above the currentâ. History The History command enables the user to save additional information with each Marker file. This information enables the user to follow up or to retrieve the positioning of a file at a specific point of time. This allows the company to create a History Log for each Marker and track the changes to a file according to dates. Two options are offered. One enables the user to add text description to the file, The second option enables the user to make a file generation with the âSave Versionâ command allowing the possibility in the future to retrieve the file layout at certain stages in the design process. Chapter 3: File Menu 75 To Enable the History Command: 1. Select History from the File Menu and activate (check) Automatically Save History on Close. 2. Click the Close button to leave the History dialog box. 3. The Save History dialog will open on every Save command. Comments may be typed in addition to saving the file with all the information as it is at the moment of the Save command. To Save History: ⢠The History dialog box is displayed when a file is saved. ⢠The date and user name is automatically noted. Mark Manuel76 ⢠Type comments in the comment field. ⢠OPTIONAL: Save graphic information by activating (checking) the Store Version field. ⢠Click OK. At any point History may be selected from the File Menu to view any comments attached to the file. Delete messages by clicking the Delete button. ! Note: If a specific layout is saved with the file, the size of the file is going to be much larger and might cause a delay during File Open. Do not save information that will not be used, or delete it before the final save. Chapter 3: File Menu 77 Open Style File The Open Style File command is used to create a new marker. It can also be used to add or merge several design or style files into an existing Marker File (DSP). It loads a style (DSN) file containing pieces that match the current material type to make a marker, and allows you to define the following: Quantities per size, Attributes for material type, Rotate directions and Quantities of pieces per set. This is the place to make last minute changes in the marker order. Values can be redefined and the changes will be good only for the current marker. OptiTex Mark remembers the last directory where you have saved your DSN or DSP files, and it will always become the default drive for Open and save. Open a Style File: 4. From the File Menu select Open Style File. The Select Style File dialog box is displayed. 5. Choose from cutting contour only, sewing contour only, or both contours. 6. Click Browse. A second Select Style File dialog box is displayed. 7. Select the desired .DSN file from the File Name list box and click Open. The Order For Marker Making dialog box is displayed. Mark Manuel78 OPTIONAL: To look in a different directory, double clicks the first option from the Look In list (usually C:\). A list of directories is displayed. Choose the directory and file that you wish to open. Click Open. The Order For Marker Making dialog box is displayed. ! Note: the PASTE button is enable only when there is style file copied to the Windows clipboard. ⢠To edit martial field and number of set double click on the file name in the âSelected filesâ window. The ORDER TO MARKER MAKING dialog box. Chapter 3: File Menu 79 ⢠Enter the material type in the Material field. ⢠Enter number of set to each size if necessary. ⢠Click on the Piece Info tab to display the pieces parameters. Mark Manuel80 Piece Info Tab: Material The material type must be entered for the selected design file. . Only the pieces in the defined material type will be loaded into the marker. A zero (0) value for the material type will load all material types. If nothing is entered in the Chapter 3: File Menu 81 material type, an error message will be displayed as a reminder. If nothing is entered it will be recognized as (0) and all material types will be loaded. Piece Name The piece information displayed on the right side of the dialog box is taken from the Info. in the DSN file (created in OptiGrade or OptiDig). Highlight the piece you wish to edit and a picture with information about the highlighted piece will be displayed. If you change the piece information at marker making time, the changes are only made to this particular marker. To ensure that the piece information is the same in all future markers, it is best to change the Info in the DSN file. Code The Code field is used to define a piece code. This field can be used to define a serial number or perhaps a code number that lets you know the type of piece. It is another area to define unique information about this piece. To display the code name on nested pieces, enable the Display Pieces on Marker option in the Options menu. Description The Description can include a name for the piece or a full explanation of the selected piece. To display the Description on nested pieces, enable the Display Pieces on Marker option in the Options menu. Quantity per Set The Quantity per Set defines the number of copies to be nested on the marker. The number will be displayed as a counter in the size list. As nesting proceeds, the quantity will decrease until all pieces have been nested or when the marker becomes full. Any pattern with a 0 quantity value in OptiGrade will not be read by the OptiMark nesting application Mark Manuel82 Import From Excel In Optitex 8.0 an order to marker making can be edit in Excel document. To import the data from the Excel sheet click on the âImport From Excel â button and locate the desire excel file. Export to Excel In Optitex 8.0 an order to marker making can be edit in Excel document. To export the data from the Dialog box to Excel file click on the âReport to Excel fileâ and refine the data that will be stored on the excel worksheet. ⢠Click OK to place the files in the Selected Files field of the Select Style Files dialog box. ! Tip: To merge additional files to the existing DSP file, use this same procedure starting from step #2. ⢠Click OK to open all files appearing in the Selected Style Files dialog box. The pieces are displayed at the top of the Marker in the Piece Display Bar. Import from SGS Modulate Modulate maintains a database of Parametric Patterns. This command display the Modulate Server window, from which you can select one or more patterns that have been assigned specific dimension values. To Import CUS file: ⢠From the âSelect style fileâ dialog box click on the âIMPORT FROM SGS MODULATEâ button. ⢠Browse the database to locate the desire Modulate file. Chapter 3: File Menu 83 ⢠Change the dimension value if necessary. ⢠From the FILE menu select LOAD FILE. ! Note: All new DSP files are loaded untitled. To save the file with a specific file name, use the Save As command in the File menu. ! Tip: To equal all the sizes quantity to all sizes click on the right button of your mouse while you pointing on the sets quantity field to display a popup menu. From this menu select âequal all â. Mark Manuel84 File Finder Find and Update command This application finds Marker (DSP) files and pieces in OptiTex Mark. After finding, the file can be opened or updated according to the style file. In order to use the Find and Update application select the File Finder command from the File menu. ! Note: The Find and Update application is also available in OptiTex PDS. Find After setting all search parameters, click on the Find button. The found items will display at the bottom of the dialog box. There are two items that can be found â Marker Files or Pieces in a Style File. These two choices affect what will display in the list of found items at the bottom of the dialog box. For example, a search for pieces with a name beginning with âBAâ with the selected item to find as Piece will result in a list of all files containing pieces with a name beginning with âBAâ . The same file might be listed a few times, because it has several pieces beginning with a matching name. If the item to find is a Marker File, the file will display only once even though it has several pieces with a matching name. Chapter 3: File Menu 85 Find and Update Dialog Boxes: Mark Manuel86 ! Note: Click on small arrow with the mouse left click to open a drop list previous fields names or use the mouse right button to open utility box for editing the previous fields names list: Find Tab: The main function of the Find Tab is to look for Marker (DSP) files according to the OptiTex application it is launched from. When working from the Mark application, it will manage Marker Files and Pieces within the Marker Files. While looking for a Marker file in the OptiTex Mark application, the Find dialog box enables the user to input further search filters, such as Style name, Piece name, Material type, Piece Description, etc. Search Options: Marker File Type a file name to search for specific Marker Files by file name. Look in This field defines the scope of the search to specific directories or sub directories. Chapter 3: File Menu 87 Show file name only Once the Show File Name Only is checked, the finder will look only for *.DSP file. Otherwise, when unchecked, the finder will look for pieces from *.DSP files. ! Note: Whenever this command is unchecked, âReplace Pieceâ and âDelete Pieceâ in the Update property page will be enabled and vice versa. Look in sub folders This option extends the search to sub folders. Filters: Piece Name filter Use this option as a filter. Types a piece name to limit the search to files that contain a specific piece. Piece Code filter Use this option as a filter. Type a piece code to limit the search to files that contain a specific piece code. Piece Description filter Use this option as a filter. Type a piece description to limit the search to files that contain a specific piece description. Material filter Use this option as a filter. Type a material to limit the search to files that contain a specific material. Mark Manuel88 Style Name filter Use this option as a filter. Type a Style Name to limit the search to a specific style name. Match case When this option is selected the program will find only files that match the case of the characters in the piece name, style name, file name and material exactly. Otherwise, the command will finds files with either uppercase or lowercase characters that match the characters in the piece name, style file name and material strings. Match whole word only When this option is selected the program will find only files that match the specified piece name, style name, file name and material with no extra characters. Otherwise, the command matches any string, whether it is a fragment of a larger string or not. Options: Find now Click this button to activate the search process. Open file Click this button to open the selected files in the OptiTex Mark program. Automatic Update Marker Click this button to automatically update piece information in the Marker file from the Style file. This update can be activated on one or more selected files. Check the Confirm Save check box if you want to confirm manually the Chapter 3: File Menu 89 saving operation of each marker file. During the automatic operation you can use the Stop button to stop the operation. Confirm Save Check the Confirm Save check box if you want to confirm manually the saving operation of each marker file after Automatic Update. Update Piece Parameters Select Cutting Contour Only, Sewing Contour Only, or Both Contours to specify what seam to work on. Often in Mark, only the Cutting Contour is needed. Select All Click this button to select all the files in the current file list. Stop Click this button to halt the search operation and return control to the user. Maximize Click this button to enlarge the Find & Update dialog box to maximum size. Cancel Click this button to quit Find and return to the host application. Select Tab: The Select Tab enables you to select and mark the chosen or current piece to copy or replace in to other files. Click the Get Style File button to access the Mark Manuel90 Style Files used in the Marker file that is currently marked in the search list (It will be in Gray color). The piece names and pieces will display. The Open button will prompt the standard Open dialog to open a Style File. The piece names and pieces will display. The Open option enables you to open any file, even if it is not in the File list. Chapter 3: File Menu 91 Options: Get Style File Click this button to load the selected style file from the file list. The selected file will be the source file. Open Click this button to open a style file. Update Tab The Update tab is used in connection with the Select tab. Files may be updated by adding a piece to a file, replacing a piece in a file, or updating an existing piece in a file. Multiple files may be selected from the File list to be updated To Add a Piece: ⢠First select the target files in the File list. ⢠Select a piece in the source file by using the Select Tab. ⢠Click on the Add Piece button. ⢠The piece from the source file is added to the target file or files in the File list. Repeat as above for Replace Piece and Delete Piece clicking on the appropriate buttons. ! Note: The Update tab can not be used until a source file has been chosen using the Select Tab. Mark Manuel92 Add Piece Click on this button to add the selected piece in the Select Tab to the current Marker File, selected in the File list. Chapter 3: File Menu 93 Replace Piece Click on this button to replace the selected piece in the Select Tab for the piece in the current Marker File, selected in the File list. Delete Piece Click on this button to delete the piece selected in the file selected in the File list. Report Tab The Report Tab prepares a report describing the contents of one or more DSP in ASCII (.txt.) format. This report can be imported into applications such as Word, Excel, Lotus and Access, for editing and/or printing. Append File When the Append File checkbox is selected, the report will be added to the end of an existing report file, rather than create a new file. Report File Name This field is used to specify a new file name for the created report, or choose an existing file name for appending the report. Report to Data Base Click this button to create a report from the currently selected style file and then, save it under the specified file name. Report to Printer Click this button to print a report from the currently selected style file or marker file. Mark Manuel94 Chapter 3: File Menu 95 Save (Ctrl + S) Use the Save command to save the current .DSP (marker) file. The Save command will save the file displayed on screen to the current path under the current name. If you are saving the file for the first time, use the Save As command. ! Note: The DSP extension will be added to the file name automatically. In Windows 95 or NT the file name can be longer then 8 alphanumerical characters. OptiTex Mark remembers the last directory where you have saved your DSN or DSP files, and it will always become the default drive for Open and Save. To Save a File: From the File Menu select Save. If the file has already been saved, OptiTex Mark will save the file with the current file name in the already specified drive and directory. To make sure you are saving with the correct options, choose the Save As command. Save As Use the Save As command to save a file for the first time or to ensure the correct file name and path are specified. To Use the Save as Command: ⢠From the File Menu select Save As. The Save As dialog box will be displayed. ⢠Enter the file name. Mark Manuel96 ⢠OPTIONAL: Select a different drive or directory to save your file. ⢠Click OK. ! Note: The DSP extension will be added to the file name automatically. ⢠Save As Dialog Box: File Name The File Name field remains empty until a file name is typed. The file type will default to DSP unless a different file format has been selected. The File List field displays the DSP files that exist in the current directory. If there is more information than what fits in the current file list box, use the scroll bars to scroll up and down the list. Chapter 3: File Menu 97 Save as Type This drop down box determines what types of files will be displayed, it should say Marker Files (*.DSP) in the Save As Type box. Attach Preview A Preview Image is attached to each Marker File. The Default image to be attached is always the arrangement of the Marker that was on the working area while the file was saved. Save in OptiTex-7 Format Allows you to save the file in Version 7.XX. Save Current Nesting The Save Current Nesting command is used when necessary to divide one order into several markers. Examples of why the entire order cannot be cut out of one marker are when the fabric can only be spread so long due to shading, limitations of spreading tables, or the fabric is sold in sheets. When one marker is full, use âSave Current Nestingâ to save it to a file. A marker is considered full when no additional pieces can be placed within the marker limit. The marker limit is defined in the Marker Definitions command in the Marker menu. During the Save Current Nesting the new marker will be given a name that is similar to the initial file name, but the last two letters will be changed to a dash (-) and a number. For example, if the original file is titled Marker.dsp, all overflow files will be given the name(s) Marker-1.dsp, Marker-2.dsp and so on. There are two options with the Save Current Nesting command. A. Save the placed (full) marker with all the unplaced pieces listed Mark Manuel98 in the Piece Display Bar. The new unplaced marker will also list the unplaced pieces in the Piece Display Bar. B. Save the placed (full) marker with zero remainders listed in the Piece Display Bar. Only the new unplaced marker will list the unplaced pieces in the Piece Display Bar. ! Note: The same option exists in the Nesting menu with the AutoSave Save of Markers command. To Save the Current Nesting ⢠From the File Menu select Save Current Nesting. The Save Current Nesting dialog box is displayed. ⢠Enter the name you wish to save the file as. ⢠Click OK. ! Tip: If the original marker was saved with zero remainders, the original remainders can be updated. Select Open Design Files from the File menu, double click on each of the Design files listed and select OK. Chapter 3: File Menu 99 Save Current Nesting Dialog Box: Browse Click on the Browse button to specify a name for the original DSP (marker) file. The additional DSP files will have the same name followed by a hyphen and a number. Write Reports to File Enabling this option will allow the marker information to be reported to the log file each time a marker is saved or plotted. Click on Change Log to specify a name for the ASCII log file. Create NST-file (cncKad) NST is one of the file formats that are used in the âcncKadâ system. By enabling this command, a NST file will automatically be created each time the DSP file is saved. Mark Manuel100 Save only nested parts (and zero remainders) When this command is enabled, the original marker will be saved with zero remainders, only the new marker will have the unplaced pieces listed in the Piece Display Bar. Export to CAD/CAM Files The Export CAD/CAM file format command converts SGS files to any of the other graphic standard file formats listed in the dialog box. Use the Layers table to define which items should be exported to which layer. The exported file is created using the working units defined in the Option Menu. To Export Files: ⢠From the File Menu select Export to CAD/CAM Files. The Export to CAD/CAM File dialog box is displayed. ⢠Type in the name of the file to be exported. ⢠Click Browse to select drive and directory where the file is to be exported. ⢠Select the desired file format. ! Note: SGS software recognizes only the basic attributes of the different ASCII geometry standards for each file format. Situations may arise where the saved file does not appear exactly as it did in the original application. The same limitation exists with the Import CAD/CAM files command. If the file is not importable, uses Import setup and change the parameters accordingly. ⢠OPTIONAL: Select any other options or set the scale size. Chapter 3: File Menu 101 ⢠Click OK. Export to CAD/CAM file Dialog Box: File name Type a name for the file to export. Browse Click on the Browse button to display the Save In dialog box to change drives and directories. Contours This feature is only available when exporting from SGS software. Choose between Sewing, Cutting, or Sewing and Cutting to define the boundary lines that will be exported. Formats: This area is used to define the type of file to be created. Choose from: Mark Manuel102 DXF is an AutoDesk/AutoCAD ASCII file format. ANSI/AAMA American National Standard for Pattern Data Interchange formats. IGES is the Initial Graphics Exchange Specification file format of NBSIR. CADL is a CADKEYO ASCIIfile format. NST is the cncKad ASCII file format. Scale Factor Unit This is used to define the scale at which the file is to be exported. The default setting is 1.0 to 1.0 or full scale. Layers Table⦠Select this button to view the Layers dialog box. This box is used to define the layers for each element of the file to be exported. Chapter 3: File Menu 103 Layers Table Dialog Box: Mark Manuel104 Dictionary Dialog Box: Piece Name Defines how the export files refers to the piece name. Piece Code Defines how the export files refers to the piece code. Annotation Defines how the export file refers to the annotation. Size Name Defines how the export files refers to the size name. Chapter 3: File Menu 105 Base Size Mark Defines how the export files refers to the base size. Material Code Defines how the export file refers to a defined material group. Quantity Defines how the export file refers to the quantity. Best Quality Defines how the export files illustrates that the following defines the best quality. Orientation Defines how the export file refers to the orientation. Restore Defaults Restores the default dictionary names for each item. Mark Manuel106 Export to DXF and AAMA Setup: Use DXF Blocks When this box is enabled, DXF Blocks will be defined in the export file. Create Point on Notch This will add point to all the notches that will be import. The point will be created on the notch base. Chapter 3: File Menu 107 Create Grading Rules For Notches This option will enable you to create grading rules for all the notches in the file that is being exported. It will only work, however, in the AAMA format. Spline Step This area is used to define the spline step amount when Donât use Splines is disabled. Arc Bulge This area is used to define the arc bulge amount when Donât use Arcs is disabled Number of Arcs Sections This area is used to define the arc sections when Donât use Arcs is disabled. Export Buttons Type Set up how buttons will be export to the marker. If all the check boxes are clear the buttons will export in the default mode as a circle. Build Unique Pieces Names If the Set box is checked, Optimark software will give unique names to all the exported pieces. The user can also set a maximum number of symbols for the names of the pieces. Mark Manuel108 Import from CAD/CAM Files The Import CAD/CAM command is an optional piece of software that is activated within SGS software packages when the Import Module is purchased. The Import Module converts any ASCII geometry file format from the list of recognized formats to the SGS file format. The new file is loaded directly onto the screen. Files from any directory or disk may be chosen as long as it is a format recognized by the Import module. ! Note: AutoCAD files can be imported into SGS software regardless if pieces were originally drawn clockwise or counter clockwise To Set Up the Import Options: ⢠From the File Menu choose Import CAD/CAM files. The Import CAD/CAM files dialog box is displayed. ⢠Select the type of file to Import by checking the appropriate file format under the File Format field. ⢠Click Browse, and a second Import CAD/CAM File dialog box is displayed. ⢠Select the desired file(s) to import. ! Tip: To select multiple files, hold down the shift key and click on the desired files. ⢠Click OK. The Import CAD/CAM Files dialog box is displayed again. ⢠Select the desired Import options. Chapter 3: File Menu 109 ⢠Click on Setup. The Import Setup dialog box will display. ⢠Select the options and enter the desired values. ⢠Click OK. The Import CAD/CAM Files dialog box will display again. ⢠Click OK. The selected files are imported with the desired values and options implemented. Import CAD files Dialog Box: Mark Manuel110 CAD Files to Import This field will list the file to be imported. Click on the Browse button to select the file or files to be imported. Working Units Select the desired working units mm, cm, m, inches, feet, or yards. SGS software uses the selected working units while converting files from one format to another. If the units are not correctly defined, the pieces are imported as the wrong size and the command will have to be repeated. File Format Choose the type of file to be imported. Following are the different importable file formats: DXF - AutoDesk/AutoCADTM ASCII file format. AAMA - The American Apparel Manufacturing Association format is based on the AutoCAD DXF file format. It was confirmed and agreed by all large CAD/CAM manufacturers. IGES - Initial Graphics Exchange Specification file format of NBSIR. CADL - CADKEYTM ASCII file format. Gerber - Gerber Cutter & Cutting Edge file format. DFT - cncKad ASCII file format. HP/GL - General output file format that can be sent to most HPGL- compatible plotters. Approved by the American National Standard of the Electronic Industrial Association. Chapter 3: File Menu 111 MICROJET- File format used with the Microdynamics plotters. Donât Build Sizes When this box is checked, all sizes of the same piece will appear as separate pieces on the Piece Bar. When Donât Build Sizes box is unchecked, all sizes of the same piece will be organized in a Size List under Piece Bar. This is an automatic procedure while importing files through AAMA format. OptiMark - Import will try combine sizes of the pieces saved in a format other than AAMA (e.g. HP-GL), if the Piece Name and the Size information have been written into each relevant piece before being exported from another CAD solution. For example: Piece Name: Back, Size: M ! Note: The information to be entered into each piece for proper size arrangement after Import needs to be in accordance with the descriptions at the Import Dictionary. Make DSN files If this command is enabled, a Style (DSN) File is created when importing a Marker File. Material This field notes the Material Group in Info for the imported file(s). Quantity Defines the quantity in Piece Info. For the imported file(s). If an import file contains several of the same pieces, SGS software reads only one and will insert the right number of copies into the Piece Info. Box. If there are differences between the images, SGS software may not recognize that the pieces are multiples of the same pattern pieces. Mark Manuel112 Ignore Internals Defines the specific components to be imported from the import file. Eliminating specific components, like Notches, Texts, Lines, Arcs, or Circles, speeds the Import procedure. Selecting the Ignore Notch or Internals option (Lines, Arcs, Circles, or Text), does not mean that these elements are not read. In this case, these elements are read without being identified or sorted. For example, a V notch on the piece perimeter becomes part of the contour rather than being recognized as a having a V notch attribute. OK Click on the OK button after selected the file to Import. The file is imported. Box Click on this button to import a file within a closed contour box. This option is used to bring in information if the file will not import properly. Use his option when an error dialog box appears such as âEntities Out of Contourâ or âNo Closed Contours Foundâ. Setup Click on the Setup button to display the Import Setup Dialog Box. Chapter 3: File Menu 113 Import Setup Dialog Box: Tolerance The Tolerance Value determines the farthest distance two points on a contour can be placed apart and still be treated as the same perimeter (SGS software usually handles only properly closed contours. However, the tolerance value ensures that some contours that are not closed properly will be read). Mark Manuel114 Bulge Chord Error Bulge Chord Error is a parameter used to define the smoothness of Curves and Arcs. A smaller value creates many additional points and segments within the piece. Min. Area: Piece If a piece boundary is smaller than the value defined in this box, the Import command disregards the piece and throws the piece away. Hole A hole is a closed contour on the same layer as the piece boundary. Use this area to define the minimum size of a hole. The minimum area of a hole should be smaller than the smallest piece. Default Internals Sizes These fields define the default settings for internals when importing from another file format. Button This field is used to set the default size for the radius of a button. Notch Depth This field is used to set the default depth of a notch. Notch Width This field is used to set the default for the width of a notch. Chapter 3: File Menu 115 Text Size This field is used to set the default for text size. If a text size was defined in the Imported file, SGS software maintains that value. Text is information typed directly onto the piece. Piece Description text is defined using the Dictionary dialog box. V Notchâs Items â Max - Angle This area is used to define the maximum angle of a V notch. Near Angle This area is used to define the smallest near angle of a V notch. Min Circle Radius This field defines the smallest size of an internal circle that will be imported. Max Notch Ratio The largest difference when dividing the width by the depth of the notch. Max Notch Depth The maximum depth for a notch. Spline Angle The smallest angle for curved lines. Max Grade Angle The maximum angle for a grading point. Mark Manuel116 Import Setup Options Ignore CR. / LF Mainly for CNC files which come in one long line, or use a CR./LF after each point. When enabled, the Carriage Return/Line Feed in the import file is ignored. Ignore Frame SGS software ignores the outer frame (boundary), which is usually created for Plot files. Separate Layers SGS software remembers the layer of each element. If the new file is ever exported, the elements keep their original layers. This option is used only for Chapter 3: File Menu 117 DXF files. Because SGS software recognizes elements and text on different layers, a circle inside a shape may make a noticeable difference in the imported file. If the circle is imported while the Separate Layers option is disabled, the circle becomes a simple internal element. If the circle is to be recognized as a hole, it must be on the same layer as the outer perimeter line, or the DXF file can be imported with the Separate Layers option in the OFF position Join Pieces This new command, enables you to Join Pieces manually and recognize them as the same piece. This function can be used after import of a DXF or another external CAD/CAM file. The recognition will accept a variation of about 2% in the area between the first piece and its copies. - Mark the pieces in the âPiece Listâ bar. Select the first piece. - By the use of the âShiftâ key Mark the second and any other related pieces. - Use the command âJoin Piecesâ from the âPiece Info. Menuâ. - If the marked pieces really match each other with only minor change, they will appear as one piece, which is the first marked piece. Auto Recognition of Internal Elements Convert the longest line to baseline: this option will convert the longest line in the piece to a baseline. This option is not available for the AAA format. Check On-Contour V-notches in AAMA files: this option will double check all the V notches that are located on the piece contour in the AAMA format Mark Manuel118 Stripe Adjust This command acts as an on/off toggle switch when working with Stripe, Plaid, and floral material. When activated, all same-type pieces will be adjusted to match the relative stripe coordinates of the first piece placed on the marker. The matching point for the pieces are determined using notches or buttons with stripe adjust numbers from 1 to 4 or by using the Stripe Adjust Group (see Marker menu, Stripe Definition and Relate Pieces to Stripes commands and Group menu, Stripe Adjust Group). Auto Recognition Pieces Descriptions from Internal Text This option allows you to choose one of the 4 display types: Disable: this will disable the software from recognizing piece descriptions ⢠Piece Name: this will only recognize the name of the piece ⢠Piece Name and Code: this will recognize the name of the piece as well it's code ⢠Piece Name, Code and Description: this will recognize the name of the piece, it's code as well as it's description from internal text. Auto Recognition Size Names from Internal Text This option will allow the software to automatically recognize size names from the internal text of the pieces. You have 2 options: Yes: this box will enable this option Numerical Only: this box will recognize only numerical values as valid size names Max. Number of Symbols setting allows you to delimit the size name Chapter 3: File Menu 119 Layers Table Dialog Box: This dialog box is only available when importing AAMA files. Format The import format that was defined in the Import to CAD file Dialog Box. Only AAMA files support Layers. Boundary Lines The layer name/number to place piece boundary lines on. Turn (Grade) Points The layer name/number on which to place turn (grade) points. Mark Manuel120 Curve Points The layer name/number on which to place curve points. Notches The layer name/number on which to place notches. Grain (Base) Lines The layer name/number on which to place the grain (base) line. Internal Lines (draw) The layer name/number on which to place internal lines. If internal lines are used and they are to be cut with an Automatic cutter, they should appear on the same layer as the outer perimeter. Otherwise, they will become internal elements with Draw attributes. Internal Cut The layer name/number on which to place internal cuts. If internal lines are used and they are to be cut with an Automatic cutter, they should appear on the same layer as the outer perimeter. Otherwise, they will become internal elements with Draw attributes. Drill Holes The layer name/number on which to place drill holes. Sew Lines The layer name/number on which to place sew lines. Chapter 3: File Menu 121 Quality Lines The layer name/number on which to place quality lines. Restore Defaults This button is used to restore the default layers for each item. Dictionary Dialog Box: The Dictionary dialog box enables SGS software to add attributes and data to each imported piece and save this data with the Piece Info. SGS software looks for the defined string and then uses the defined value or text that expresses the string parameter. Mark Manuel122 Style Name Defines how the import program searches for the style name. Piece Name Defines how the import program searches for the piece name. If a piece name string is not defined, the longest line of text in the import file becomes the Piece Name. Piece Code Defines how the import program searches for the piece code. Annotation Defines how the import program searches for annotation. Size Name Defines how the import program searches for the size name. Base Size Mark Defines how the import program searches for the base size. Material Code Defines how the import program searches for the fined material group. Quantity Defines how the import program searches for the defined quantity. Chapter 3: File Menu 123 Best Quality Defines how the import program searches for the defined best quality. Orientation Defines how the import program searches for the defined orientation. Restore Defaults This button is used to restore the default dictionary names for each item. Plot About Plotting Use the Plot command to Plot or Cut the displayed pieces. Files can be plotted at a plotting device connected directly to one of the serial ports on your machine, or plots can be plotted to a plotting device connected to a network. The new Output Control Center (OCC) is a utility that manages plot files as well as queues on local and networks computers. Use the print manager of your choice. The OutMan (Output Manager) is a Windows utility supplied by SGS software, which manages files. Files can be sent to up to eight different serial printers or plotters. The QMan works in co- ordination with the OutMan and acts as a spooler for the different plot files. The OutMan also works in a network situation. From different workstations, network files can be sent to different devices and OutMan plots them without interfering with the regular workflow of SGS Applications. If the OutMan is selected, enable the use of OutManâs application in the Plot dialog box. Also, refer to the Configuring SGS Software to Your Plotter section in the Installation and setup chapter of the manual. Mark Manuel124 There is a difference between the Plot and Print commands. Plot is used when using the OutMan print spooler to support your large pen plotters (Gerbers and Iolines) and InkJet/Dot Matrix plotters (HP600, EnCad, AlgoTex, and the CalComp InkJet). A4/Letter paper size is referred to as small, and all paper sizes larger than this are referred to as large. Print is used when using the Windows print spooler and windows to support your small InkJet/Laser/Dot Matrix printer (such as HP, Canon etc.). ! Note: If you use only one plotter, you will not have to select and configure a plotter each time. The configuration will be saved in the OUTMAN.INI. If you have more than 1 plotter, once they are configured you will only have to specify the PLTR#. Plotter Installation Make sure that your plotter is installed and turned on. ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area. Plotter (Output Manager) Setup In order to use the plot command to send a job to an existing plotter, SGS software must be configured properly. The Plotter Setup command defines the communication parameters for the plotters in use. Up to 8 different plotters can be defined in a network. ! Note: Select between the OutMan and the OCC as the output manager in the Plot dialog box. The "Use Output Manger" must be checked. ! Note: The communication parameters in the computer output port should have been previously set to match the same parameters in the output device. A print manager for a Local or Network Plotter should have also been installed. For more information, refer to the Configuring SGS software To Your Plotter section in the end of this book. Chapter 3: File Menu 125 Setting the OutMan as Output Manager ⢠From the Plot dialog box select the OutMan as output manager. ⢠From the File Menu choose Plotter (Output Manager) Setup. The Plotter Setup Dialog box is displayed ⢠Enable the Output Manager by clicking the box. A small V is placed in the box. ⢠Next, specify where the settings you select are to be saved; to do this you will need to locate your Output Manager INI file. Click Browse to view your directories. The Output Manager INI File dialog box will be displayed. ⢠Select the OptiTex directory. (The file Outman.ini automatically displays in the File Name field.) ⢠Click OK. The Plotter Setup dialog box is displayed with the selected Outman.ini path shown ! Note: The SGS PDS, Grading, and Marking software all use the same OutMan and Plotter Setup dialog boxes. Some options only apply to PDS and are not accessible in the Marking software, and vise-versa. ⢠Select the plotter by clicking the drop down arrow to the right of the current plotter and select the appropriate PLTR#. ! Note: The number of plotters in the list depends on how many plotters were specified during the Marking program Installation procedure. ⢠Click OK. Mark Manuel126 To Output Using the OutMan Print Manager: ⢠From the File menu choose Open. The Open dialog box will display. ⢠Select the desired Design file. ! Tip: To open a file quickly, double click the file name. ⢠Click OK to open the file. Select a piece. ⢠From the File menu select Plot. The Plot dialog box is displayed. Verify that the correct file is displayed in the file name box. If not, click Browse and select the correct file. ⢠Select the desired options. ! Tip: Verify that the correct Set up, paper size and plotter width, have been selected prior to clicking OK. ⢠Click OK to save changes and exits the Plot Setting Dialog Box. The pieces will be plotted or cut. ! Tip: Once a file has been sent to the OutMan, you can continue to work at your computer. SGS software uses the WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get) system while printing and plotting. This means that what you see (on the screen) is what you get from the output device. Chapter 3: File Menu 127 Setting the Output Control Center (OCC) as your plotting spooler The Output Control Center (OCC) is a 32 bit spooler that supports both serial and parallel communication. To prepare a queue for the OCC spooler, use âPlotter Setupâ wizard dialog box: In order to run âPlotter Setupâ wizard dialog box follow the next steps: ⢠Select âUse Output Managerâ option from Plot dialog box. ! Note: if âUse Output Managerâ is disabled you need to set outman.ini file from âPlotter Select /outman Setupâ dialog box. ⢠Now select âOCCâ from âOutput Manager Serviceâ section on plot dialog box. Mark Manuel128 ! Note: if OCC queue is empty a message box that âThere is no default queueâ¦â will be opened, use âOKâ button to open âPlotter Setupâ wizard dialog box. If you choose âCancelâ button a message box that âFailed to create a default queueâ¦â will be opened. ⢠Use âSetupâ button in âOutput Manager Serviceâ section to load âPlotter Setupâ wizard dialog box. Creating a new queue with âPlotter Setupâ wizard dialog box: ⢠Click on the Add button to add a new plotter queue. ⢠Select "My Computer" if your computer is a local computer (computer that is connected to the printer/plotter). If your computer is a remote computer, select "Network Computer". ⢠In case of a local computer queue âCommunication settingâ page will be open: Communication Protocol â OCC spooler supports four different protocol types: Standard Protocol - Use this protocol to drive serial plotters with RS 232 communication interface. Chapter 3: File Menu 129 Gerber Protocol â Use this protocol to drive Gerber ACCUPLOT machines: 300, 310, 320 and 750. Lectra Protocol â Use this protocol to drive Lectra E-32 and E-33 machine (Lectra âFlypenâ machine uses different protocol). OptiJet Protocol â Use this protocol to drive OptiJet printer. Communication Attribute and Communication Parameters â If you are driving a serial machine select correct communication parameters: Port, Baud Rate, Parity, Data Bits, Stop Bits, CTS/RTS, XON/XOFF, DTR Signal and RTA signal. If you are driving a parallel machine, select only the correct LPT port. In case of a remote computer queue, âNet Work Plotterâ page will be opened. Mark Manuel130 You can type the name of the remote Computer (the computer that is connected to the machine) and click Connect, or double click on Entire Network tree to browse and find your computer. Once you find your computer, click on theâ+â sign to see the plotters shared on this computer. Select the desired plotter, then Finish. ⢠Last page âLocal Plotter Settingâ â The âLocal Plotter Settingâ page is only for a local computer queue: ⢠Plotter Name â Give your new queue a name (this queue name will be displayed on OptiTex plot dialog and in the OCC tree queues). ⢠Plotterâs Queue Folder â This is OCC queue folder path, you will be able to find your new queue under the queue folder. This is highly recommended not to change the queue folder path! ! Note: Each queue folder contains two different file types: *.job â this file is an OCC property file which holds all job attribute like: Job status, etc. *.out â this file contain the plotting data (HG-GL, DM-PL, AP-GL etc). Chapter 3: File Menu 131 Shared Plotter â Use this option to share you queue directory. ! Note: In case that your operating system is Windows 95, 98 or millennium, you need to share the queue directory and OCC directory manually!! Use Finish button to make a new plotting queue. ⢠After creating a new plotting queue the âPlotter Setupâ dialog box will show the new queue in the queue list. ⢠Select the new queue from the queues list and set this new queue as a default queue by using âSet Defaultâ button or double click. ⢠Now use âCloseâ button to close âPlotter Setupâ dialog box. Mark Manuel132 ! Note: After you close âPlotter Setupâ dialog box, plotter/cutter setup dialog box will show, choose the correct parameters for you machine and confirm your selection with âOKâ. where the plotter is connected. Plotter connected to network computer You can type the name of the remote Computer (computer with the plotter) and click Connect, or double click on Entire Network to browse and find your computer. Once you find your computer, click on the + sign to see the plotters shared on this computer. Select the desired plotter, then Finish. You can now ready to plot to a remote plotter across your network. Adding Plotter on Local Computer Select the Port (COME, LP, etc) your plotter is connected to, then Next. give the plotter queue a name For each plotter a Queue is created to hold, process and store files for your plotter. The default location will be displayed in the Plotters Queue Folder. To change the Queue location, click on the Browse button then select the desired location for the Queue. Chapter 3: File Menu 133 Check the Shared Plotter box to make this plotter is available to other computers. Once you have the desired settings, click Finish to add the selected device. Plot Dialog Box: Mark Manuel134 File Name The File Name field contains the destination and name of the plot or cut file that you are creating. To select a different file name or directory click on Browse. Use Output Manager This option must be enabled to use the OutMan or the OCC. The output mangers allow automatic plotter, if the OutMan or the OCC are not enabled, the plot file is created and stored in the displayed directory. Then, the plot file has to be copied to the appropriate port. Network Plotting Enable this command when plotting through the network. Output Manager Service Choose between the OCC (Output Control Center) or the OutMan. Alert on Start When this option is enabled, a message will alert the user that the job is about to start plotting. This message is displayed on the screen of the computer attached to the plotter. Click OK to proceed. Alert on End When this option is enabled, a message will alert the user that the job has finished plotting. This message is displayed on the screen of the computer attached to the plotter. Click OK to proceed. Chapter 3: File Menu 135 Remove on End When this option is enabled, the plot file is deleted after it is plotted. Copies This option allows specification of he number of copies to be plotted. Plot to Ftp This option enables you to upload the plot file to ftp server. How To Use The FTP Plot Utility Feature: There are three basic things that OptiTex user should have in Order to use the new FTP plot utility feature: ⢠IP address (Internet protocol) of the destination computer. ⢠Password in case that the destination computer is password protected. ⢠User Name in case other users share the destination computer. Now, you can contact your computer using standard network cable to the destination computer network. After you connect to your network follow the following steps: ⢠Go to âPlot Dialogâ box. ⢠Use âSetupâ button in âFTP Plotâ section in order to open ftp dialog box: ⢠Insert the destination Computer IP addresses to âAddressâ windows Mark Manuel136 and if there is a need, insert User name and Password. ⢠Now press on âBrowseâ button to access your destination computer network (the access process can take some time). ⢠From the âSelect Working directoryâ windows select the working directory which will be a target directory for the plot will.? On the âPathâ windows the selected directory path will be displayed (you canât edit the path on the âPathâ windows). ⢠Confirm your selection with Ok button. ⢠On the Plot dialog check âUse FTP plotâ option. ⢠Send the plot file to this destination using âOkâ on plot dialog box. Log File Reports â Use This option writes plot information to a log file that contains information about the marker, number of pieces placed and material usage. The log file can then be used for tracking plotted files. To view the log file, use a text editor or select Solutions Reports from the Nesting Menu. Change Log Click on Change Log to change the text file to which the plot information is written. Note (Custom Header) This option allows the user to type in notes or instructions and plots them at the end of the marker in the header. Note that if Marker Header is disabled, the notes do not plot. Chapter 3: File Menu 137 Plotter/Cutter Setting This option displays the plotter type in use and how it is configured. It also displays the plotter page size. Plotters and plotter settings can be changed in the Plotter Setting dialog box. To open the Plotter Settings dialog box click on Setup. Plot Setting Dialog Box: The Plot Setting dialog box can be accessed through the Plot dialog box. Mark Manuel138 Device Name Name is the assigned name of the plotter. Up to 8 plotters can be defined. They are listed as PLTR1, PLTR2, etc. The name can be changed in the Plotter Setup command. Driver Format This option displays the Language the plotter is using. Consult your plotter/cutter manual for language information or call the Fax Back Service (1- 800-766-6644) for specific information related to your plotter or cutter. Plotter Size. Each output device, whether it is a plotter or a cutter, is treated as a plotter. Each kind of an X Y machine has its own type of command file or language. The following plotter types are supported: DMPL (*.DMP) HPGL (*.HPG) HPGL PlotTec (*.HPT) HPGL Generic (*.HPG) HPGL/2 (*.HP2) Design Partner (*.DP) IOLS (*.IOL) EIA (*.EIA) Cybrid Plotter Cybrid Cutter/Plotter Chapter 3: File Menu 139 Mutoh Plotter APGL Gerber Plotter (*.GGT) AP700 Plotter Gerber Cutter (*.GBR) Eastman Cutter (*CMD) Cutting Edge Cutter (*NC) Wild Plotter/Cutter Wild Plotter (*.WIL) Microjet (*STD) External Format Device Options Page in Center This option keeps jobs aligned when using more than one page. Most plotters have their 0/0 point located at the Bottom Left point of the paper, although some may have their 0/0 point set at the center of the page. If using a plotter that has a 0/0 point at the center, enable this option. This orientation setting is used primarily for flat bed plotters. Manual Frame Advance This option is used primarily on flat bed plotters and plotters that do not feed paper automatically. The plot stops at the end of each page to allow for paper Mark Manuel140 replacement. If this option is enabled, the Enter key must be pressed after each page. Use CR/LF in Code Certain Gerber Cut Formats only use this option. Some Gerber cutters require a new line after each command and some do not. The best way to check if your cutter needs to have a new line is to look at one of its example files. If the file is one long paragraph, this command is not necessary. If the file starts each command on a new line, this option must be enabled. Use Initialization in File Header [//â¦] Some Gerber Cut Formats use this option. When enabled, it instructs the cutter to stop and wait for the user permission to continue/start the job. Not all Gerber plotters support this command. Consult the Gerber Userâs Manual for information on plotter/cutter support. Use Bite Offset This option is only supported by the Gerber Cut format. When enabled, it instructs the plotter to put a small alignment mark on the fabric at the end of each frame. The small mark is placed outside the Marker area so as not interfere with the actual marker. Plotter Page Size Determines the working area of the plotter. The program will ârememberâ the last setting even if it was for a different plotter. X is the length of the frame or the endless length of the paper roll. Y is the width of the paper. For information on a specific plotter or cutter, call the Fax Back service (1-800- 766-6644) for instructions related to the plotter or cutter of your choice. Chapter 3: File Menu 141 Gap after Plotting This is the space the plotter puts at the end of the plot job. The default is 0. Minimal Plot/Cut line This option is only used for some Gerber plotters. It specifies the minimum distance at which a line is still being cut. It saves plotting/cutting time to not cut two points that are too close to one another. Min. Plot Spline Segment Minimum Plot Spline Segment is similar to the Bulge Corde Error. It converts any arc segment under a certain size to a simple straight line in order to save time. File Header by using the this command you can add and customize header to the file . type in the desire command for piloting to Gerber plotter which do no support the command. File Footer by using the this command you can add and customize footer to the file . type in the desire command for piloting to Gerber plotter which support a file footer. Mark Manuel142 Font Options: Use Plotterâs Built in Fonts When this option is enabled, the plotter substitutes the fonts used on the computer with its own built in fonts. Not all plotters have built in fonts. Consult the plotterâs manual for font information. Using the plotters built in font speeds up plotting. Plotter Font File Click Browse to select a font file. The Open Font File dialog box displays allowing a font to be selected from a specific drive or directory. If Use Plotters Built in Fonts is disabled, you must use the .FNT file. Default Font Size (Inches) This is the font size, which the plotter automatically uses if no other size is specified. The default is .315. Tools Setup Tab The new tools setup feature enables OptiTex users to plot different line type according to tool number or tool type. There are several different plotter formats to support different lines type: HG-PL, DM-PL, HG-PL/2, Wild Plotter, AP 700 Plotter, Muto Plotter etc' ! Tip: You can use OptiTex new feature to select a tool name, just click with mouse right button on "Tool Number/Layer Name" section and a dialog box will be open: Chapter 3: File Menu 143 How to work with "Tool Setup" tab on "Plot Setup" dialog box: The new tools setup feature enables OptiTex users to plot different line types according to tool numbers or tool types. There are several different plotter formats, which are support different lines type: HG-PL, DM-PL, HG-PL/2, Wild Plotter, AP 700 Plotter, Muto Plotter, etc.' Mark Manuel144 How to define a special tool for a selected element: ⢠To define a special tool number for a selected piece use "Tool Number/Layer Name" section on "Piece Info" dialog or "Cut Order" dialog on Piece menu. ⢠To define a special tool number for an internal element use "Tool Number/Layer Name" section on internal element attribute dialog box.. Select the desired internal element and use the double click function to open the attribute dialog box (you select the internal and then open the internal attribute dialog box from "Edit" menu). You can also add a special tool number for internal on "Cut Order" dialog box. ! Tip: You can use the new OptiTex feature to select a tool name:, just click with right mouse button on "Tool Number/Layer Name" section and a dialog box will open: Insert the tool number in the "Head Number" column on the corresponding rows according the desired tool or command type. Remember you can only use numeric names in the "Head Number" column! Select the desired line type from the list. Don't forget to fill in the tool number into the "Number of Heads" windows Chapter 3: File Menu 145 Number of Heads This option is used with multi-pen plotters or plotters that have one pen and one knife. Default Pens Default Pens commands allow to select a specific tool for a specific command (cut, draw and cut internals). Default Pens commands are enabled in several formats like, HP-GL, DM-PL, HP-GL/2 etc. For example: Your output device working with HP-GL formats and has three tools: The Tools setting are: Number of Heads = 3. Draw = 2. Cut Contour = 1. Cut Internals = 3. Explanation: Tool number one will be using for an element that has attribute cut. Mark Manuel146 Tool number two will be using for an element that has attribute draw. Tool number three will be using for an element that has attribute cut internals. Plot Options Plot Continuous Select this option to plot continuously. Plotters with roll paper generally plot continuously. Plotters with manual page feed do not plot continuously. ! Note: If the actual marker is wider than the plotter, the selected option is Scale equal to 1 X 1 and Continuous Plot is enabled, then special marks are plotted to join two or more sections of the plot. Marker Header When this option is enabled, general maker information such as size, plies, and number of pieces placed, notes, etc. is plotted at the end of the marker. Marker Boundary When this option is enabled, the marker boundary or frame is plotted around the marker edge. Scale Factor This option specifies the scale in which the image is to plot. The default scale is 1 to 1. One Frame This option scales the selection to fit on one plotter page and works in conjunction with Plot Continuous. Chapter 3: File Menu 147 Frame Advance After Last Frame This option when using a pen plotter that plots in defined frames. (For example, the Ioline 600 plots in 46â frames) It is necessary to check this option so that the plotter will advance after plotting the first frame. Whole Pieces in Frame Only This option is using with flat bead plotters/cutters. When this option is enabled any piece that is not within the frame in whole will not be plotted or cut. Order by Tools This option is used when more than one pen or knife is used to cut or draw the marker. When enabled, all sections assigned to one tool can be sent at the same time: all the notches are cut or plotted first, then drills, then punches, and then the cut sequence. This allows for a changing of tools between sections. Pens (Tools) According to Sizes When using a multiple pen plotter, it is possible to assign each size a different pen. Select this option to enable plotting with pens according to size. Check Intersections before Plotting The marker is plotted exactly as it appears on the screen (WYSIWYG). When this option is enabled, the software checks the marker for overlapping pieces and displays a warning message if any found. The overlapping pieces will be plotted as they are, if this option is not checked. Mark Manuel148 Optimize Plot/Cut Order This command is used to define a portion of the marker to be optimized for plotting or cutting. If selected, an additional dialog box will be opened where the optimization limits can be defined. Bulge (Corde Error) Inches The Bulge Corde Error setting is the smallest size at which an arc can appear and still be plotted as an arc. When plotting arcs with very small bulge chords (practically straight lines) it is faster to plot them as straight lines. This saves plotting time. If the Bulge Corde Error is set to 0, the curve is plotted, no matter how slight. Plotter Setup ! Note: the plotter setup dialog box is different between the OutMan and the OCC. Plotter Setup Dialog (OutMan manager) Use Output Manager Select this option to use the Output Manager provided by SGS. When this option is disabled, the plot file is created but is not sent to the output device. Chapter 3: File Menu 149 Output Manager INI File: The default INI file is C:\OPTITEX\OUTMAN.INI. If a different INI file is desired, select Browse to display the Output Manager INI-File dialog box and select the appropriate file. Current Plotter Select the plotter to be used in the Current Plotter drop down box. Up to 8 different plotters can be configured in a server setting. Plotter Setup Dialog (OCC) ⢠Select the plotter to be used in the plot command. ⢠The plotter can be set as default by clicking the SET DEFAULT button Mark Manuel150 ⢠Click "Close" Print Use the Print command to output pieces to a printer. The Printer drivers are part of Microsoft Windows, so SGS software displays the printer driver(s) that was (were) selected when Microsoft Windows was installed. The Print command uses Windows printer drivers and spoolers; therefore, the output device must be installed through the Windows Setup before printing takes place. Print is used when using the Windows print spooler to support small InkJet/Laser/Dot Matrix printer (such as HP, Canon etc.). A4/Letter paper size is referred to as small, and all paper sizes larger than this are referred to as large. Text sent to printer can be different from the text seen on screen. Use the Fonts Command in the Options Menu to change the font type and size To Print a File: ⢠From the File Menu select Print or click the Print icon on the tool bar. The Print dialog box is displayed. ⢠Select the desired printing options. ⢠Click OK. Chapter 3: File Menu 151 Print Dialog Box: Choose what to print: Marker, Pieces and Report Format Options Single page Use this option to print your marker on a single printer page. Multiple pages Use this option to print your marker on multiple pages. Mark Manuel152 Fixed Scale Use this option to print a real scale of your marker. Options Only current Piece Use this option to print only the selected piece. Marker Header Use this option to print your marker header (In OptiTex marker is all the information that displayed on marker status bar). Marker Boundary Use this option to print a frame around the printed marker. Print X-direction This option is available only when âFixed Scaleâ option is selected. Use Print X- direction option to divide the printed frames on the X- direction (length), the default is Y- direction (width). Print Continuous This option is available only when âFixed Scaleâ option is selected. Use Print Continuous option to send all the printed pages continuously. Check Intersection Use this option to check for intersections on your marker before sending the marker to printing. Chapter 3: File Menu 153 Report to File Use this option to send your marker file into a text report. The Report to File option in available only one the Report check box is checked. ! Note: When you send you report into a file, Report to Excel dialog will be open. Weight per sq Use this option (only when the report check box is checked) to calculate the fabric weight on your current marker. Remember to insert your fabric weight ser sq - working units (if your square working units are inches it will be sq.inches) into the Weight per sq windows. ! Note:Use this field to add any text information into your printed marker header. Report to Excel and E-Mail utilities Generates a report in Excelâs native format from OptiTex PDS and E-Mails the report and the file directly from OptiTex PDS. The style file can be converted to excel file and can be mailed and reported by using this dialog box. Mark Manuel154 Report Contains Marker Drawing Use this option to draw your marker into your Excel report. Pieces / Order Information Use this option to add information on your marker order into your Excel report. Internal Information Use this option to add your Excel report information abut the size, quantity of the internals elements (buttons, notches etc) in your marker. Chapter 3: File Menu 155 Detailed Piece Information Use this information to add your Excel report information on pieces: pieces perimeter, pieces area etc. Excel File By clicking on the ââ¦â button you can browse the files on yours hard drive and define the name of the excel file to be created. You can set excel file visible and the after saving the file it will be opened automatically. Other option is to appended report to existing file and then the report will be added at the end of the Excel file that has been chosen at the upper field. MetaFile To create a MetaFile you must check the box. The scale X and scale Y fields gave the option to increases or decrees the size of the MetaFile. "â¦" â by clicking this button you can browse your drive to locate the place that the file will be saved Mail OptiTex can mail the style files to any mail recipient. You can attendee to the massage 3 different files. DSN file â mail the style file as he saved by optitex. Excel report â mail the excel file. Mark Manuel156 MetaFile â mail a picture witch can insert to any office document or can be opened with acrobat reader. To Mail a File: ⢠The E-MAIL dialog box appears. ⢠Enter the e-mail address that you want to sand the massage to. ⢠You have the option to attach more files and to add the massage name and subject. ⢠Click O.K. The massage with the attached files will be sand to the desire address Chapter 3: File Menu 157 Send To Enter the mail recipient e-mail address. E-mail massages can be mail to unlimited number of recipients. Attachment To add files to the e-mail massage check the âAdd current fileâ box and the âAdd Filesâ button to locate the files to sand. Exit (Alt+F4) Select the Exit command to close the Style File and exit the program. To Exit the Program: From the File menu chooses Exit or press ALT+F4. Mark Manuel158 Chapter 4: Piece Menu 159 Chapter 4: Piece Menu Piece information and attributes can be changed in the Piece Menu by using Info, Piece Info, or Global Info dialog boxes. The changes made in these dialog boxes will only be applied to the open marker file. For permanent changes to piece information and attributes, it is best to make changes using Global Info or Info in the Optitex PDS program. ! Note: A marker can hold up to 800 pieces with an unlimited number of plies. There can be up to 900 pieces, including all sizes, in the Piece Display Bar. Each pattern contour can have up to 1000 segments. Each piece can have no more than 100 internal elements. If these quantities are insufficient, please contact your local dealer. Info (Ctrl+I) This command is used to verify, update and change all text and parameters of the selected piece and size. The Piece Information includes the style and piece name, code, description, number of copies and current plies, remainders, buffering information, area and perimeter measurements, priority in auto nesting, orientation of the piece, rotation limits, locked piece and flipping information. Mark Manual160 Piece Information dialog: To Use Piece Info: ⢠From the Piece Menu, select Info or press CTRL + I. The Piece Information dialog box will be displayed with the current settings for the highlighted pattern piece. ⢠Select the desired options. ⢠Click Apply. Chapter 4: Piece Menu 161 While the Piece Info Dialog Box is displayed, the next piece or size can be edited by clicking on the desired piece or size in the Piece Display Bar. The attributes for the highlighted piece will be displayed in the Piece Information dialog box. Piece Name The piece name field is used to define the name of the piece. Code The code field is used to assign the pattern piece a code number. Description The description field is used to describe the selected piece. The description will be printed in the Piece Info report. Block Size The X and Y distance of a piece that has been Block Fused. Quantity The total number of copies to be nested on the marker. The number will appear as a counter in the size list. As nesting proceeds, the quantity in the size list will decrease until all pieces have been nested or the marker is full. Plies The number of current plies used on the marker. Using the optimum calculations in the marker menu can change the number of plies. Mark Manual162 Remainders The number of extra pieces calculated for the current marker. Buffer Size A buffer area is applied around the full perimeter of all the pieces in the selected size. The working units used are the same as those used for marker dimensions. ! Note: If a buffer value has been specified, the contour of the piece will appear increased on the marker unless Buffered Contour is unchecked in the Pieces on Marker dialog box under the Display Menu. ! Tip: Select Up, Down, Right, or Left to add a Buffer to a specific side of the piece. ! Note: Check which working units are being used before changing the buffering of a piece. Be careful not to mix your working units (there are two working units fields Liner and Area). Area The surface area covered by the piece. The units of measurement are the same as those used for marker dimensions. If the marker is 54 x 54 inches, the area is displayed in inches. The area is net value. If a buffer was declared, it will also be included in the area value. Perimeter The boundary distance around the piece. The units of measurement are the same as those used for marker dimensions. Chapter 4: Piece Menu 163 Orientation This area is used to define if the piece is a right, left, or unknown. If there are 2 copies requested and Both is checked, one right and one left piece will be placed on the marker. If there are 2 copies requested and Both is unchecked, two identical pieces will be placed on the marker. If Left or Right is defined an L and/or an R will be displayed on the nested piece in the piece description. Folding Allowed When placing a tubular marker, some pieces can be folded along the top and/or bottom edge of the marker edge. Use the Fold Up/Down option to specify which pieces can be folded. When placing a perfectly spread face to face marker, some pieces can be folded along the left and right edge of the marker edge. Use the Fold Left/Right option to specify which pieces can be folded. Directions When nesting pieces, OptiMark will attempt to rotate pieces to obtain the best fit within the marker. Pattern Pieces many be assigned one-way rotation, two- way rotation, four-way rotation, or anyway rotation. With one-way rotation, a piece has no rotation. Two-way rotation allows the piece to rotate in 180- degree increments. Four-way rotation allows the piece to rotate in 90-degree increments. When an Anyway rotation is defined, the piece can rotate any amount. Flip Allowed Flip Allowed option allows the pattern piece to be flipped in the up, down, left, and right direction. Mark Manual164 Max Tilt Max Tilt defines the maximum amount that piece can be manually tilted in the marker. After defining the angle (usually no more than 5 deg.), use the F11 and F12 keys to tilt a piece in the marker. Locked Piece If enabled, the pattern piece will not be placed when marker is auto-nested. Material The Material option defines the specific material group of which the highlighted piece is included. If you would like the piece to be placed in a different material group, you can change it here for this one marker. Print Report This command will print a summary report of the information defined in the Piece Information dialog box. You can change the fonts using the Fonts option in the Options Menu. Best Quality This option is used to define the quality of leather that this selected piece must be cut from. The attributes for each piece are displayed on the Size List as symbols or letters. The symbols allow you to view the properties of each piece without having to open the Piece Info dialog box. Chapter 4: Piece Menu 165 = 90° Rotation allowed (4 way) = 180° Rotation allowed (2 way) < > = No rotation (1 way) = All Rotation allowed (anyway) = Orientation: Both = Up/Down Folding allowed = Left/Right Folding allowed = Locked piece for Automatic nesting = Buffer is declared = Remaining pieces after plies are calculated = Mirror allowed Mark Manual166 All Sizes Info Attributes for all sizes of a selected piece can be set in this dialog box. Chapter 4: Piece Menu 167 To Set All Sizes Info: ⢠From the Piece Menu choose All Sizes Info. ⢠Enter the desired values. ⢠Click Apply next to each changed value. ⢠Click Close. The following attributes can be set in the All Size Info dialog box as well as attributes described in the Piece Information Dialog Box. Adjust description Control the maximum text size of the piece description on the pattern pieces. Optimize Internalâs Sequence When this button is clicked, the software assigns the best cutting order for internal elements on the pattern pieces. Quantity Amount of the pattern pieces to be placed on the marker can be changed in this field. Mark Manual168 Global Info The Global Info controls information settings for all sizes or specific sizes on all pieces or specific pieces in the marker. Chapter 4: Piece Menu 169 To Set Global Info for all Sizes on All Pieces: ⢠From the Piece Menu choose Global Info. The Global Pieces Info dialog box is displayed. ⢠Enter the desired values. ⢠Click Apply after each changed value. To Specify Settings for the Selected Size on Selected Pattern Pieces: ⢠Hold down the Shift key and select the pieces in the Piece Display Bar. ⢠In the Global Info dialog box, check the Settings For Selected Pieces Only and/or the Settings for Selected Sizes Only options. ⢠Select the size for which you want to assign attributes. ⢠Enter the attributes for that size. Click Set after each change. ⢠Click Close to exits the Global Information dialog box. The following attributes can be set in the Global Piece Info dialog box as well as the attributes described in the All Size Information Dialog Box. Selected pieces in the Piece Display Bar can be edited. Settings for Selected Sizes Only When this command is enabled, only the select sizes in the Piece Display Bar can be edited. Mark Manual170 Weight Per Sq. Yard Weight of the fabric can be entered in this field. Click Re-Calculate button to update the values in the information box listed above. Internal Text Defines the size of the minimum and maximum internal text on pieces. Set to Default When checked, the defaults will be reset to use adjusted descriptions and internal text sizes. Delete This command deletes the piece or size selected in the Piece Display Bar. All nested pieces will be removed from the marker. ! Tip: To select multiple pieces in the marker, hold down the shift key and select the pieces you wish to edit in the Piece Display Bar Delete a Piece: ⢠From the Piece Menu, select Delete. Chapter 4: Piece Menu 171 ⢠In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to delete all sizes of the piece, click No to delete the selected size only. The Piece will be removed from the Piece Display Bar and the marker. Flip Vertical The Flip Vertical command creates a mirror image of the selected piece. The mirrored piece is added to the Piece Display Bar with the same piece attributes as the original. To Flip a pattern Vertically: ⢠Select the piece in the Piece Display Bar. ⢠From the Piece Menu choose Flip Vertical. ⢠In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to mirror all sizes of the piece, click No to mirror the selected size only. A mirror image of the selected piece will be added to the end of the Piece Display Bar. This option can be used to change the piece direction and to create a new piece with an opposite direction. Mark Manual172 Flip Horizontal The Flip Horizontal command creates a mirror image of the selected piece. The mirrored piece is added to the Piece Display Bar with the same piece attributes as the original. To Flip a pattern Horizontally: ⢠Select the piece in the Piece Display Bar. ⢠From the Piece Menu choose Flip Horizontal. ⢠In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to mirror all sizes of the piece, click No to mirror the selected size only. A mirror image of the selected piece will be added to the end of the Piece Display Bar. This option can be used to change the piece direction and to create a new piece with an opposite direction. Chapter 4: Piece Menu 173 Make Hole (Ctrl+H) A hole is a shape within the marker that has smaller pieces inside of it. A hole can be used for block fusing for nesting leather. The Make Hole function allows the user to place small pattern pieces on an odd shaped piece of fabric such as leather. The shape is placed in a box on the marker. ⢠Select the piece in the Piece Display Bar to make the hole. ⢠From the Piece Menu, select Make Hole or Ctrl+H. ⢠In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to Make Hole all sizes of the piece, click No to Make Hole the selected size only. ! Note: One pattern piece for each size is created with a locked attribute for auto nesting. Mark Manual174 Join Pieces The Join Pieces function allows to similar pieces to be combined and be treated as the same pattern piece in the Piece Display Bar. Select the first pattern piece to be joined. Use the âCtrlâ key and select the second piece. From the Piece Menu, select Join Pieces. ! Note: If the joined pieces match each other with only minor change, the pieces will appear as the first selected piece. Edit Piece The Edit Piece command provides a special editing environment for last minute changes to piece. These changes are only made to the selected piece and over ride attributes defined in the Piece Info dialog box. ! Note: If you want all future markers to display these pattern changes, the piece must be edited in OptiTex PDS. Chapter 4: Piece Menu 175 To Edit a Selected Piece: ⢠Select the pattern piece in the Piece Display Bar. ⢠From the Piece Menu, choose Edit Piece. The Piece Pattern Editor dialog box is displayed. ⢠Select the desired option(s). ⢠Click Apply and Close. Piece Pattern Editor Dialog Box: Mark Manual176 Original Selecting Original will return the piece to its original state before any changes were made in the Piece Pattern Editor dialog box. Flip To use the Flip option, check the Horizontal or Vertical fields at the bottom of the dialog box and click Apply. Add Point The Add Point option adds a point to the piece buffer perimeter but does not add a point to the original perimeter. Select the Add Point button, click where the point is to be added, and click Apply. Mirror The Mirror option adds a piece to your marker that has been symmetric duplicated. Select the Mirror button, click and drag on mirror line, and click Apply. Rotate The rotate command allows a piece to be rotated. This change is only made to the selected piece and over rides attributes defined in the Piece Info dialog box. ! Note: There are many ways to rotate pieces in OptiMark. The 90/180 icon, the Rotate icons, and rotating with the mouse follow the attributes that have been defined in the Piece Info dialog box. The Edit Piece and Rotate functions found in the Piece Menu allow the marker maker to create separate attributes for a pattern piece. Chapter 4: Piece Menu 177 Delete Point The Delete Point command is used to delete points added with the Add Point command to the buffered perimeter of a piece. Select Delete Point, click the point to delete and click Apply. Cut This command is used to split/cut/divide a single pattern piece either horizontally or vertically. To Cut a Piece: ⢠From the Piece Pattern Editor dialog box, click the Cut button. ⢠Enter a seam allowance value. ⢠Select Horizontal or Vertical. ⢠Click your mouse along the bottom edge of the graph on the right side of the dialog box for horizontal cutting, or along the left side for vertical. ! Note: Enable the Half option to split the piece in half. If you want to split the piece a specific amount, disable the half box. ⢠Drag the mouse to the desired location. ⢠Select Apply. ! Note: When cutting a piece into two parts, two new pieces are displayed in the Piece Display Bar with the same quantity as the original piece. Mark Manual178 Buffer Buffer can be applied to a specific area of a piece and added to all the pieces in a specified size. To add a buffer to only one piece in one size on the marker, create a new piece by copying the old one and buffer it. ⢠In the Piece Pattern Editor dialog box, select the Buffer option. ⢠Enter a buffer value in the field. ⢠Check Around, Up, Down, Special, Right or Left. When using Special, click on a line between two points. The line will highlight. ⢠Click Apply. ! Note: The buffer will be executed only if it is possible to create one. Move Point The Move Point command is used to move points on the buffered perimeter of a piece. Select the Move Point button, click and drag point to the new location and click Apply. Rotate This command rotates a piece in the Piece Dialog Box or a piece nested within the marker by a pre-determined angle. The base piece can not be rotated if there is already a piece placed on the marker. ! Note: There are many ways to rotate pieces in OptiMark. The 90/180 icon, the Rotate icons, and rotating with the mouse follow the attributes that have been defined in the Piece Info dialog box. The Edit Piece and Rotate functions found in the Piece Menu allow the marker maker to create separate attributes for a pattern piece. Chapter 4: Piece Menu 179 To Rotate a Base Piece: ⢠Select the piece in the Piece Display Bar. ⢠From the Piece Menu, select Rotate. The Rotation by Angel dialog box is displayed. ⢠Select the desired option(s). ⢠Click Close. To Rotate a Piece within the Marker: ⢠Select the piece in the Marker. ⢠From the Piece Menu, select Rotate. The Rotation by Angle dialog box is displayed. ⢠Select the desired option(s). ⢠Click Close. ! Tip: Group the pieces before selecting Rotate to rotate several pieces at one time. Mark Manual180 Internals (Ctrl+E) The Internals dialog box allows internal attributes in a pattern piece to be changed for a selected piece and size. Attributes on each internal element include size, direction, cut/plot order, etc. Call the Fax Back System to learn how the options should be set for various NC Cutters. Internals Dialog Box: Chapter 4: Piece Menu 181 Internals The type of internal being edited on the selected piece is highlighted. Internals that can be edited include buttons, lines, arcs, circles, contours, dart points, or pleats. Use the arrows in the dialog box to edit a different internal on the piece. Notches The type of notch you are currently editing is highlighted. Notches to edit include T, I, L, V, U, or Box. Use the arrows in the dialog box to edit a different internal on the piece. Length, Depth, Radius, Perimeter A new length, depth, radius, or perimeter can be defined for a selected internal. Type the new value and click Apply. Width, Arcâs Length A new width or arc length can be defined for the selected internal. Type the new value and click Apply. Mode The Mode option allows the user to define which tool the numerically controlled (NC) cutter will use to cut or draw the selected internal. The options include Draw, Cut, Drill M43, Aux Drill M44, Punch M68, Quality, Sew, and None. Stripe Adjust Number A Stripe Adjust Number on selected notches and buttons can be assigned. Stripe Adjust Numbers are used for Stripe/Plaid markers. For more information on the Stripe Adjust Numbers, refer to the Stripes and Relate Piece to Stripes commands in the Marker menu. Mark Manual182 Operation Stop The Operation Stop command defines the Op Stop for the selected internal: No Stop, Before With Confirmation, or Stop. Plotting / Cutting Time The Plotting/ Cutting Time command defines the when the internals will be cut on a pattern piece: Before the external contour, Together with the external contour, or After the external contour. Sequencing the Internalâs Cutting Order: Show Numbers The order in which each internal is cut will be displayed when this option is enabled. Set This option changes the order in which the selected internal is cut. Sort The Sort function quickly reassigns the order in which each internal is cut. Forward The Forward function reassigns the cut order for each internal forward. Arrows The arrows move between internals that are being edited on a piece. Chapter 4: Piece Menu 183 Inverse The Inverse function reverses the direction in which the selected internal will be cut or drawn. Delete This option deletes the selected internal. Apply The Apply button must be clicked for the pattern edit to take place on screen. Close To exit the Internals dialog box, click Close. Mark Manual184 Internal Text Select the internal text command in order to edit text to piece To add an internal text: ⢠Choose the internal command from the piece menu. ⢠Click add to add a text ⢠Enter you desire text in the Text Editor box. ⢠Select the font size and the angle. ⢠You can apply to all the size by checking the âapply to all the sizeâ box. ⢠To remove a text: click on the desire text and click remove. Chapter 4: Piece Menu 185 ⢠Click O.K. Holes and Internal Contours The Holes and Internal Contours command is used to define whether pieces can be nested within the internal cut outs of larger pieces, to change the cut order of internal cutouts, or to change the cut direction of internal cutouts. Holes and Contours Dialog Box: Mark Manual186 Under Current section Change type Use this option to change internals contour attribute from holes to contours or from contours to holes. OptiMark software âtreatâ different internals with hole attribute. If your internal contour attribute is hole, OptiMark automatic nesting will place pieces in the hole if they fit. ! Note: If the internal contour attribute is hole, in case of cutting the internal contour, cutter entry point will be inside the hole. This way you can avoid the cutter knife to damage your fabric. Delete Use the Delete button to delete a selected contour. Closed Contour Use this option to close internal line to a close contour. Chapter 4: Piece Menu 187 Now you can change to internal contour attribute to âholeâ. Mark Manual188 Cut Order Use this option to open âCut Order Optimizationâ dialog box for editing your internal contour cut direction. Current Shows selected internal cutout. The Change button defines the selected cutout as a Hole or a Contour. The Delete button deletes an internal cutout. The Inverse button changes the cutting direction of an internal cutout. Area/Perimeter The area and perimeter of the selected internal cutout is displayed. Global Set The minimum and maximum size of holes and contours is set in this area. Chapter 4: Piece Menu 189 Sequence The Arrows change the order in which internal cutouts will be cut. If checked, show Numbers displays the order in which internal cutouts will be cut Hole Level The Hole Level command is used in the leather industry. When cutting leather there are different zones, hole levels, with different qualities located one inside another (pieces are nested on leather according to the area & quality). Use Hole Level command when you have several holes located one inside another. The level sequence goes from the biggest hole (the external hole) being level one to smallest hole. (The number of levels is according to the number of holes located one inside another). Global Change Internals Parameters The Global Change Internals Parameters dialog box allows the attributes of the internal elements to be changed to at one time. Changes in type, size, and whether internals are cut or drawn can be made to a currently selected piece, all sizes of the current piece, or all pieces in the marker. ! Note: This command is very important after importing files that are created for specific cutting machines or for exporting to a machine not commonly used. Mark Manual190 Global Change Internals Dialog Box: Pieces Select All to apply changes to all the pieces in the file. Select All sizes of current to apply changes to all the sizes of the current selected piece. Select Current only to apply changes to the selected size of the piece. Internal Types The Type of Internals to edit includes notches, lines, arcs, buttons, circles, dart points, or contours. Chapter 4: Piece Menu 191 Internal Sizes Defines the size of the new internal element. Current The type of internal to be changed is selected on the left side of the dialog box. New The type of internal to replace selected internal is on the right side of the dialog box. All All selected internals on all pieces and all sizes will be edited when this is checked. Place Selected Pieces Place (Ctrl+P): Use this command to place a selected piece or pieces on the marker area. ⢠In the Piece Display Bar, select the pieces to place. ⢠In the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place or CTRL+P. ! Note: When you place the pieces with Place command, a pattern piece will be placed on the marker even if the quantity in the Piece Display Bar is 0. The software will not be able to place the pieces on the marker by double clicking the mouse if the quantity in the Piece Display Bar is 0. Mark Manual192 Place One Set (Ctrl+Shift+P) Use this command to place one set or bundle of the selected piece or pieces on the marker area. ⢠In the Piece Display Bar, select the pieces to place. ⢠In the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place One Set or CTRL+SHIFT+P. Place All (Ctrl+Shift+Alt+P) Use this command to place all of the selected pieces on the marker area. ⢠In the Piece Display Bar, select the pieces to place. ⢠In the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place All or CTRL+SHIFT+ALT+P Place Folded Left This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the left edge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Left can only be used on Faced or Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on the right/left. ⢠In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold along the left boundary of the marker. ⢠From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place Folded Left. ! Note: The piece can also be placed along the left boundary of the marker by placing the cursor in the desired location on the left edge of the marker boundary, holding down the L key, and double clicking the left mouse button. Chapter 4: Piece Menu 193 Place Folded Right This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the right edge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Right can only be used on Faced or Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on the right/left. ⢠In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold along the right boundary of the marker. ⢠From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place Folded Right. ! Note: The piece can also be placed along the right boundary of the marker by placing the cursor in the desired location on the left edge of the marker boundary, holding down the R key, and double clicking the left mouse button. ! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move the pieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simply return the piece to the Piece Display Bar. Place Folded Up This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the upper edge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Up can only be used on Tubular or Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on the up/down. ⢠In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold along the upper boundary of the marker. ⢠From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place Folded Up. ! Note: The piece can also be placed along the upper edge of the marker by placing the cursor in the desired location on the left edge of the Mark Manual194 marker boundary, holding down the U key, and double clicking the left mouse button. Place Folded Down This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the lower edge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Down can only be used on Tubular or Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on the up/down. ⢠In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold along the lower boundary of the marker. ⢠From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place Folded Down. ! Note: The piece can also be placed along the lower edge of the marker by placing the cursor in the desired location on the left edge of the marker boundary, holding down the D key, and double clicking the left mouse button. Place Folded Left-Up This command is used to fold a piece into quarters and place it in the upper left corner of the marker boundary. Place Folded Left-Up can only be used on Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on the up/down and left/right. ⢠In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold into quarters and place in the upper left corner of the marker boundary. ⢠From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place Folded Left-Up. Chapter 4: Piece Menu 195 ! Note: The piece can also be placed along the upper left corner of the marker boundary by holding down the Home key (located on the numeric keypad) and double clicking the left mouse button. Place Folded Left-Down This command is used to fold a piece into quarters and place it in the lower left corner of the marker boundary. Place Folded Left-Down can only be used on Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on the up/down and left/right. ⢠In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold into quarters and place in the lower left corner of the marker boundary. ⢠From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place Folded Left-Down. ! Note: The piece can also be placed along the lower left corner of the marker boundary by holding down the End key (located on the numeric keypad) and double clicking the left mouse button. Place Folded Right-Up This command is used to fold a piece in quarters and place it into the upper right corner of the marker boundary. Place Folded Right-Up can only be used on Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on the up/down and left/right. ⢠In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold into quarters and place in the upper right corner of the marker boundary. ⢠From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place Folded Right-Up. Mark Manual196 ! Note: The piece can also be placed along the upper right corner of the marker boundary by holding down the Page Up key (located on the numeric keypad) and double clicking the left mouse button. Place Folded Right-Down This command is used to fold a piece in quarters and place it into the lower right corner of the marker boundary. Place Folded Right-Down can only be used on Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on the up/down and left/right. ⢠In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold into quarters and place in the lower right corner of the marker boundary. ⢠From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place Folded Right-Down. ! Note: The piece can also be placed along the lower right corner of the marker boundary by holding down the Page Down key (located on the numeric keypad) and double clicking the left mouse button. Chapter 5: Marker Menu 197 Chapter 5: Marker Menu The Marker Menu contains commands related to the marker and nesting functions. Use the Marker Menu to specify marker dimensions, clear a marker, place pieces on the marker, remove pieces from the marker, and detect when pieces are overlapping. The usual workflow of preparing a marker is as follows: ⢠Load a design (DSN) file by choosing the Open Design Files command from the File menu. ⢠Define the material type and order values for each size in the Order for Marker Making dialog box. ⢠Define the number of Plies by using the Optimum Calculations command in the Marker menu. ⢠Define the marker width and length and spreading method by using the Marker Definitions command in the Marker menu. ⢠Place the pieces into the marker area by nesting them automatically or interactively. Pieces can be placed automatically with the Start Auto Nest command in the Nesting menu. Pieces can be placed interactively by using the various icons, commands, and short cut keys. ⢠Plot or cut the marker by using the Plot command in the File menu. Marker Definitions (Ctrl+M) This function specifies options related to the current marker, such as, the marker size, salvages and the fabric spreading method. Mark Manual198 To Apply Marker Definitions: ⢠In the Marker Menu, select Marker Definitions. The Marker Definitions dialog box is displayed. ⢠Select the desired options. ⢠Enter the desired information. ⢠Click Ok. Marker Definitions Dialog Box: Chapter 5: Marker Menu 199 Dimensions The size of the last marker is saved as the default size for the next marker. To change the size, use the Choose Marker option or enter a new width and length value. Width This field defines the width of the fabric. Length This field defines the length of the fabric. The length value is only a reference value for the maximum length of your cutting table and can be changed at any time. The waste and efficiency are calculated to the dashed efficiency line. Number of Plies Defines the number of plies for this maker. The optimum calculation command in the marker menu might suggest changing the number of plies. Layout Mode There are four spreading methods that can be used to define a marker: Singular, Tubular, Faced, and Folded. The spreading method will effect the calculation of piece quantities placed on the marker. Singular Singular layout indicates that the fabric will be spread all face up or all face down. Tubular (UD) Tubular layout indicates that the fabric is created in a tube. The pieces can be Mark Manual200 folded on the upper or lower edges of the marker. Tubular markers must have at least 2 plies. Faced (LR) Faced layout indicates that the fabric must be spread face to face with folds on the right and left side. Faced markers must have at least 2 plies. Pieces can be folded on the right and left edges or the maker. Folded (All) Folded layout indicates that the fabric has been spread face to face with folded edges on the right and left side. Pieces can be folded on the upper, lower, right, and left edges of the marker. Folded markers must have at least 4 plies. Total Pieces Area This field calculates the total area of all the pieces in the marker and displays the net area of material needed to place the pieces. X Origin The X Origin describes the waste area along the left edge of the marker. X End The X End describes the waste area along the right edge of the marker. Y Origin The Y Origin describes the waste area along the bottom of the marker. Y End The Y End describes the waste area along the top of the marker. Chapter 5: Marker Menu 201 Marker Area with Waste Limits Waste Limits can be defined for any side of the marker area. This area of the marker can be used as extra space to place pieces when creating a marker interactively but will not be used when autonesting a marker. Use Bump lines Bump lines are used on the marker area as temporary boundary lines. Lines can be placed manually with the cursor or set in the Marker Definition dialog box. Bump lines are not shown when plotting. Type of Material Text entered in the Type of Material field is displayed in the marker header on the plotter. Marker List The marker list display all the markers that save by the OptiMark software. At the marker list you can change any of the marker parameters (width, length and description) by double click on the desire field. One more click on the Apply button will bring the marker's dimensions and name to fields in the marker definition dialog box. Mark Manual202 Clear Marker (Ctrl+C) This command clears and resets all pieces from the marker. To Clear a Marker: ⢠From the Marker Menu select Clear Marker or press CTRL+C. A confirmation dialog box is displayed. ⢠Click OK to clear the marker. The dialog box will disappear, and the marker will be cleared. The size list and the information line will be reset to its initial values. Remove (DEL or CTRL+R) This command clears only the selected piece(s) from the marker and sends them back to the size list. The size list will be updated accordingly. To Remove Pieces or Groups: ⢠Select the desired piece(s) to remove from the marker. ! Tip: Press and hold the Shift key while clicking individual pieces to add them to the group, or click and drag a box around the group of pieces to remove. If only one piece is being removed from the marker area, double click on the piece. ⢠From the Marker Menu select Remove, double click on the piece(s), alternatively press CTRL+R, or press DEL. All selected pieces will be removed from the marker and will reappear in the size list. Chapter 5: Marker Menu 203 Piece Parameters The Piece Parameters box enables you to change parameters for a selected piece: Style Name This field shows the style (design) name of your selected piece. ! Note: The design file name can be printed at the end of the marker, but it cannot be printed on each piece in the marker. Mark Manual204 Size Name This field shows the size name of your selected piece. Piece Name The Piece Name field shows the piece name of your selected piece if the selected piece has a piece name. ! Note: The piece name is changed in the Info dialog box (Piece menu), but canât be changed in the Piece Parameters dialog box. Code Code Name window shows the Code name of your selected piece. You will see a code only if your selected piece have a code. ! Note: The piece code is changed in the Info dialog box (Piece menu), but canât be changed in the Piece Parameters dialog box. Description The description window shows the description of your selected piece. You will see a description only if your selected piece has a description. ! Note: The piece description is changed in the Info dialog box (Piece menu), but canât be changed in the Piece Parameters dialog box. Placement on marker The Placement on Marker gives the location of a selected piece by coordinates. Chapter 5: Marker Menu 205 In the X field moves left, center and right. The piece can move horizontally by entering a new coordinate value to one of the three fields. In the Y field moves top, center and bottom. The piece can move vertically by entering a new coordinate value to one of the three fields. Flip If the Flip option is checked the piece will be flipped in the selected fashion. It does not matter whether Mirror Allowed is enabled or disabled in Piece Info. ! Note: The piece is not flipped until the user clicks Ok. Rotation The rotation field assigns an angle for the piece to be flipped. Any other attributes specified for the placed piece are disregarded. ! Note: The piece is not flipped until the user clicks Ok. ! Tip: There are many ways to rotate pieces in OptiMark: the 90/180 icon, the Rotate icon and mouse methods of rotating read the options that have been defined in the Piece Info dialog box. The Edit Pattern and Rotate commands found in the Piece menu do not read the Piece Info. No. Of Plies Reserved The No. Of Plies Reserved to the Piece allows the user to control the ply number on your selected piece. Mark Manual206 When changing the ply numbers for a specific piece use the No. Of Plies Reserved command. When the number the number of plies change, the number of pieces remaining in the Piece Display Bar will change. The No. Of Plies Reserved To The Piece command, enables the user to plan the spreading table in special cases, for example: a Vest that have three pieces: one back and two fronts, the order for this specific vest will be: 50 S size and 50 L size. The number of plies on the spreading table is 100, but only 50 back pieces are needed for each size. ! Note: If the No.Of Plies Reserved To The Piece command is not used, an illegal piece intersection may result and the piece quantities will not be updated according to the pieces that are locate on the working area. ⢠Selected each of the Back pieces. ⢠From Marker Menu Select the Piece Parameters option. In the No.Of Plies Reserved to The Piece window, enter 50 plies for Chapter 5: Marker Menu 207 each of the Backs, now locate the S size on the L size. ! Note: If the number of spreading table plies is only one, the No. Of Plies Reserved To The Piece window will be disable. Legal Intersection A check in this field allows selected pieces to intersect. ! Note: If there is an intersection between your selected piece and another piece, the piece will be aligned. Stop before cutting A check in this field will stop before cutting the selected piece. Donât cut the piece Choose this option and the selected piece will not be cut. Mark Manual208 Copy Marker The Copy Marker command copies the marker to the window clipboard. The marker can then be pasted into other Windows applications. Duplicate (Ctrl+D) Select the Duplicate command to duplicate and place a selected piece(s) on the marker. The duplicate pieces will be deducted from the size list box. To Duplicate Piece(s): ⢠Select the piece(s) to duplicate. ⢠In the Marker Menu select Duplicate or press CTRL+D. A duplicate of the selected piece(s) will be placed immediately above the original. If there is insufficient room, it will be placed to the right and below the original piece. Chapter 5: Marker Menu 209 Array This function allows one or more pieces that are placed on the marker and duplicated in columns and rows. To Create an Array: ⢠Select the piece(s) to duplicate. ⢠From the Marker Menu select Array. The Array dialog box is displayed. ⢠Enter the desired values. ⢠Click OK. Mark Manual210 Array Dialog Box: Columns Enter the number of columns to create. Columns are added to the right of the selected Piece(s). Row Enter the number of rows to create. Rows are added above the selected piece(s). X Step This option allows a distance to be set between the center of the first piece and the center of the second piece in the X direction. If no step amount is defined, the pieces will duplicate as close to on another as possible. Y Step This option allows a distance to be set between the center of the first piece and the center of the second piece in the Y direction. If no step amount is defined, the pieces will duplicate as close to on another as possible. Chapter 5: Marker Menu 211 Grid X When this option is enabled, the pieces will duplicate in columns first (horizontal direction). When this option is disabled, the pieces will duplicate in rows first (vertical direction). Enable Quality Overflow Enable Quality Overflow allows OptiMark to complete the number of rows and columns that are specified when not enough pieces exist in the size list box. Mark Manual212 Alignment The Alignment command is used to place pieces in relation to other placed pieces on the marker. Horizontal by Marker Center This command is used to align pieces horizontally along the center of the marker. ⢠Group the pieces that should be aligned. ⢠Select Alignment/Align Horizontal by Marker Center in the Marker Menu or press Alt+Ctrl+M. H Horizontal by Upper Limit This command is used to align pieces horizontally on the top of the marker. The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece closest to the markerâs upper boundary. ⢠Group the pieces that should be aligned. ⢠Select Alignment/Align Horizontal By Upper in the Marker Menu or press Alt+up Arrow key. Chapter 5: Marker Menu 213 Horizontal by Lower Limit (Alt+Down) This command is used to align pieces horizontally on the lower area of the marker. The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece closest to the markerâs lower boundary. ⢠Group the pieces that should be aligned. ⢠Select Alignment/Align Horizontal By Lower in the Marker Menu or press Alt+Down Arrow key. Horizontal by Piece Center (Alt+Ctrl+H) This command is used to place the selected pieces in the maker center. The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece closest to the markerâs left boundary. ⢠Select the pieces to be placed to the marker center. ⢠Select Alignment/Align Horizontal Piece Center in the Marker Menu or select Alt+Ctrl+H arrow key. Vertical by Left Limit (Alt+Left) This command is used to align pieces vertically on the marker. The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece closest to the left boundary of the marker area. Mark Manual214 ⢠Group the pieces that should be aligned. ⢠Select Alignment/Align Horizontal by Left in the Marker Menu or press Alt+Left Arrow key. Vertical by Right Limit (Alt+Right) This command is used to align pieces vertically on the marker. The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece closest to the right boundary of the marker area. ⢠Group the pieces that should be aligned. ! Note: To Create a Group, click and drag a box around the desired pieces on the marker, or press and hold the Shift key and click to add other pieces to the group. A minimum of two pieces is required to create a group. ⢠Select Alignment/Align Horizontal By Right in the Marker menu or press Alt+Right Arrow key. Chapter 5: Marker Menu 215 Vertical by Piece Center This command is used to tell OptiMark that the marker center will now be the alignment place. The four marker center commands refer to the Alignment at Marker Center. ⢠Make sure there are no pieces selected or highlighted in the marker area or piece display bar. ⢠Select Alignment/Align Vertical By Piece Center in the Marker Menu or press Alt+Ctrl+V Arrow key. ! Note: To Create a Group, click and drag a box around the desired pieces on the marker, or press and hold the Shift key and click to add other pieces to the group. A group consists of two pieces minimum. Replace Pieces on Marker Pieces placed on the marker may be replaced with new pieces after the marker has been created. For example, if a marker is complete the pocket piece on the marker can be swapped with a different pocket piece (different style). The pocket piece is pasted into the Marker and then the Replace Pieces on Marker command is used to swap the old pocket piece for the newly loaded pocket piece. ! Note: To paste a pattern piece from PDS into the Marker see Help for File menu> Open Design File> Cut and Paste a Pattern Piece from PDS into the Marker. To Replace Pieces ⢠Select the piece to replace from the Piece Display Bar. Hold down the Shift key and select the new piece from the Piece Display Bar. Mark Manual216 ⢠From the Marker Menu select Replace pieces on Marker. The Replace Pieces On Marker dialog box is displayed. ⢠Optional: Enter the desired Incremental Rotation value or enable the Mirror option. ⢠Click OK. Replace Pieces on Marker Dialog: Incremental rotation The replacement piece is rotated by the degrees entered in this field. Do mirror If checked, a mirror is created of the replacement piece. ! Note: Use Detect Intersections after using Replace Pieces on Marker command from the Marker Menu to detect any overlapping pieces. Chapter 5: Marker Menu 217 Substitute The Substitute command creates a new marker with the same placement layout a previously created marker. For example, you can use the Substitute command to make a new pant marker using size small instead of size large. To Substitute using different sizes: ⢠Open the marker file from which to take the piece layout of a new marker. ⢠From the Marker Menu select Substitute. The Substitute dialog box is displayed. ⢠Click Browse and select the design file that is currently placed in the displayed marker. ⢠The left side of Sizes Substitution display box displays the old size and the right side displays the replacement size. To substitute the replacement size, simply highlight the old size on the left side of the screen and then highlight the desired replacement size on right side of the screen. ⢠Click OK. To Substitute using different design files: ⢠Open the marker file from which to take the piece layout of a new marker. ⢠From the Marker Menu select Substitute. The Substitute dialog box is displayed. ⢠Click Browse and select the design file that is currently placed in Mark Manual218 the displayed marker. ⢠The left side of Sizes Substitution display box displays the old size and the right side displays the replacement size. To substitute the replacement size, simply highlight the old size on the left side of the screen and then highlight the desired replacement size on right side of the screen. ⢠The left side of Pieces Substitution display box displays the old piece names and the right side displays the replacement piece names. To change the new replacement name, simply highlight the old piece name on the left side of the screen and then highlight the desired replacement piece name on the right side of the screen. ⢠Click OK. Chapter 5: Marker Menu 219 Substitute Dialog Box: Cutting, Sewing, or Both Determines the piece boundary/contour displayed and plotted in the marker. Browse file to substitute Defines the design file containing the new pieces. Current Design File Displays the design file in the current open marker file. Mark Manual220 Sizes Substitution Defines the new size(s) that will replace the old size(s) in order to create a new marker. Pieces Substitution Defines the new piece(s) that will replace the old piece(s) in order to create a new marker. Incremental Rotation Defines a rotation of the pieces before substituting them. Do Mirror Allows the pieces to flip before rotating them. Delete Unused When Delete Unused is enabled, the pieces from the old marker will delete from the Piece Display Bar. Chapter 5: Marker Menu 221 Detect Intersections The Detect Intersection command checks the pieces for overlaps. All overlapping pieces flash on screen and their colors change. The exact point of the overlap (intersection) will be indicated by a flashing rectangle. Overlapping pieces return to their initial color only after being moved to an unrestricted location and Detect Intersections is executed a second time. ! Note: You can change the color of an overlapped piece by choosing the Colors command in the Options Menu. Check Current Solution The Check Current Solution command checks the marker for complete sets/bundles, non-complete sets/bundles or overlapped pieces. Mark Manual222 To Check a Current Solution ⢠From the Marker Menu select Check Current Solution. The Check Solution dialog box will display. ⢠Enter the desired information. ⢠Click Detect Intersections, Flash Sets or Flash Remainders. Black flashing rectangles will indicate the intersections, sets or remainders. If new pieces added or moved causes overlaps, the intersected pieces will blink again. ! Note 1: Red dashed lines indicates overlapped pieces. In many cases, the overlap is detected only by a fraction of a millimeter and the user may choose to leave the nesting as it is. The same Check Solution command also appears before any print is executed. ! Note 2: The color of each set/bundle can be changed using the Colors command found in the Options menu. ! Note 3: The figure indicated in the size list box shows the number of pieces left to be placed. When the figure in the size list box turns gray, all pieces in the selected size have been placed. When the figure in the size list box turns dark blue, extra pieces (remainders) were placed in the marker. Highlight Selected pieces This new command helps you to find the selected piece on the marker. The selected pieces would be displayed in different color then the other pieces on the marker. Chapter 5: Marker Menu 223 Optimize Marker Cut/Plot Order This command is used to define a portion of the marker to optimize for numerically controlled (NC) cutting. It is not available until the cut order numbers are displayed on the screen. Plotters can plot portions of pieces and then advance the paper. Cutters must cut the entire piece and then advance the fabric or paper. ! Note: The cut order numbers can be displayed by enabling Cut/Plot Order in the Display menu, or clicking on the Show Cut/Plot icon.Cutter Ordering Dialog Box: Cutter Ordering Dialog Box: Mark Manual224 Shared lines The Shared Line module is used for Plot, Cutting and other output capabilities. It allows the software to automatically detect shared lines (Common lines) between pieces on the marker. The recognition is made according to following defined parameters: Minimum Length of shared line sections, Maximum Distance of the shared lines and Maximum Angle between shared lines (the maximum Angle to be recognized as the same line can be set). ! Note: If files are imported from another system, it is recommended to set the attribute for the cutting direction and start point of the contour. OptiTex Mark selects a âStart Pointâ according to the location of the pieces. If a âStart Pointâ has been established, check the âDo not changeâ option in the Cut/Plot Order Optimization dialog box. Chapter 5: Marker Menu 225 Use Frame, X and Y When Use Frame is enabled, enter the X and Y maximum frame value of the cutter. The cut order numbers will change to meet the frame values. Optimization Limits This option limits the pieces that are part of the defined frame size. Start from Top of Marker When this option is enabled, the cutter will cut the pieces at the top of the marker before cutting the pieces at the bottom of the marker. Choose Start Points When this option is enabled, OptiMark will choose the optimum points for the cutter to begin cutting each piece. Choose Cutting Direction When this option is enabled, OptiMark will choose whether to cut each piece in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction. ! Note: The Plot or Cut Order can be changed interactively, simply click the piece to cut or plot first. The piece chosen will change the cut order on the marker and will become number one. Move to the piece to cut/plotted next, click on it and continue this process for every point. ! Note: If you already created a cutting sequence for your marker and you want change the sequence (you missed a piece), use âShiftâ key together with the mouse cursor to insert a piece into cutting sequence. Mark Manual226 Selected Piece Cut Order Selected Piece Cut Order can be used to interactively define where the numerically controlled (NC) cutter starts to cut the pieces and whether pieces are cut clockwise or counter clockwise ! Note: The cut order numbers can be displayed by enabling Show Cut/Plot Order in the Display menu. To Optimize the Piece: ⢠In the Marker Menu, click Select Piece Cut Order to display The Cut Order Optimization dialog box. OptiMark will default to cutting the entire piece in the clockwise direction. ⢠Use the dialog box to change the start and end points, cutting direction, tool, etc. ⢠OPTIONAL: To make multiple traces, select Add, the second trace will be added. Use the dialog box to change the start and end points, cutting direction, tool, etc. Before adding the third trace, make sure the trace that is to be split is displayed, then select Add. ⢠After all traces have been added and edited, click Ok. Chapter 5: Marker Menu 227 Cutting Order Optimization Dialog Box: Sequence Number during Cutting Displays the order in which the piece will be cut. Change the order by changing the sequence number. Set to All Same Pieces When this option is enabled, all of the same pieces will have the same cutting Mark Manual228 attributes. When this option is disabled, only the cutting attributes on the currently selected piece will be changed. Current Trace A piece can be cut in many different cut segments. For example, one curve on the piece should be cut counterclockwise and the rest of the piece should be cut in the clockwise direction. The Current Trace field displays the current path that is being edited. Starting Point The arrow on the piece indicates the cutter start point for the current trace. The arrows are used to change the start point. If Optimum is checked, the optimum starting point is set by the software. If Default is checked, the start point will default to the original position that was the first point digitized or the point defined in PDS. Ending Point This field displays the ending point for the current trace. Cutting Direction If checked, the current trace will be cut in a clockwise direction. If unchecked, the current trace will be cut in a counter-clockwise direction. Tool Indicates the tool to be used when cutting the current trace. Enable Multiple Cutting of Segments When enabled, one trace can be cut more than once, each time with a different tool. This is very important when cutting metal. Chapter 5: Marker Menu 229 Optimum Calculations OptiMark finds the right marker length and number of plies to create the most efficient marker with the least waste. The initial calculations are based on the total area needed or the total length of material required according to the efficiency reached. These parameters and information are a basis for change. After checking the results, decisions can be made regarding what width or length of material to choose. To Perform Optimum Calculations: ⢠In the File Menu, select Open Design Files to load a DSN file. ⢠Define the material type and order values for each size in the Order for Marker Making dialog box. ⢠In the Marker Menu, select Marker Definitions to define the marker width, length and spreading method. The Marker Area and Efficiency Evaluation dialog box is displayed. ! Note: It is recommended to place at least one set (two or more sizes are recommended). This displays an indication of the real efficiency, which can be achieved for the current job. ⢠In the Marker Menu, select Optimum Calculations. Verify or change the selected parameters. ⢠Click âCalcâ. ⢠Click Close Mark Manual230 Marker Area and Efficiency Evaluation Dialog Box: Area Usage This field is used to enter the target efficiency percentage of the marker. For example, enter 80 in the area usage window and then click âCalcâ to the left of Number of Plies. The value in the Number of Plies window will display the number of plies necessary to place all the pieces in the defined marker width and length. If the Area Usage and Number of Plies is entered, the length the marker required to place all the pieces in the marker with the defined number of plies and efficiency is displayed. Estimated Total Area The value listed in this field shows the total area of all the pieces in the marker multiplied by the efficiency percentage entered. Chapter 5: Marker Menu 231 Estimated Total Length This value is the estimated total area divided by the width of the marker. Marker Length The default value field is taken from the Marker Definitions dialog box in the Marker Menu. The estimated total area, the number of plies, and the marker width are used to determine the value. Marker Width This value is taken from Marker Definitions in the Marker menu. Number of Plies The default value in this field is taken from the number of plies defined in the Marker Definitions dialog box. Click âCalcâ to the left of Number of Plies to calculate the needed number of plies. The value is determined by the marker length, marker width, and estimated total area. Plies Calculations This command is used to calculate and find the optimum number of plies needed for a cutting job. The number of plies will be calculated based on the number of pieces. If the division is not exact, the letter R (for Remainders) is listed in the Size List and Piece Info dialog box. ! Note: OptiMark calculates the optimum number of plies according to the number of pieces, with minimum remainders. Mark Manual232 Weights Selecting this option displays the Weights dialog box. Enter the weight of the fabric. The box below displays the total area and weight of fabric needed for all the pieces. Bump/Cut lines This command enables you to create multiple bump lines with draw and cut attributes as well as a vertical overcut. Chapter 5: Marker Menu 233 To crate bump or cut line: ⢠Point the cursor on the marker table borders ⢠Clicks and drag line from the edges. ⢠Place the lines on the marker table. ⢠From the marker menu select âBUMP/CUT linesâ command ⢠In the Bump/Cut line dialog box you can edit the exact coordinates of the lines and to change the attribute of them by selecting the desire option. ⢠Click âapplyâ. And then OK ! Note: cut or bump lines can be added from the dialog box by clicking on the add button and entering the new line coordinates. ! Note: The âcut bump lineâ is used for cutting between the pieces and marker borders. OptiTex marker will never cut a bump line on a piece even if the bump line attribute is cut Fabric Pattern Use the Fabric Pattern command to create a bitmap image of the actual fabric displayed in the marker area. Mark Manual234 Fabric Pattern Dialog Box: View This area defines how the bitmap will display in the marker area. Disable If checked, no bitmap is displayed. Marker If checked, the bitmap is only displayed on the marker area. Selected Pieces Only If checked, the bitmap is only displayed on the selected piece. All Pieces On Marker If checked, the bitmap is displayed on all the pieces in the marker. Matching Fabrics Into Pieces This command will display the chosen fabric instead of the piece color. Chapter 5: Marker Menu 235 Pattern Length (X Value) This value represents the length of the repeated bitmap on the X dimension. The bitmap will be scaled to fit in this length. Pattern Height (Y Value) This value represents the width of the repeated bitmap on the Y dimension. The bitmap will be scaled to fit in this width. Bitmap File This field defines the bitmap file. Load Fabric Dialog Box The new dialog box âFabric Patternâ provides the user with the ability to connect fabric pattern (bitmap) to a specific material type. To crate a material file: ⢠Use âLoad Fabricsâ button from the initial fabric pattern dialog box. Mark Manual236 ⢠Click on the âAddâ button. ⢠Enter the material type name or choose from the list of materials. Chapter 5: Marker Menu 237 ⢠Click OK The new materiel will be added to the list in the fabric pattern dialog box. To connect the new material type to a pattern (bitmap): ⢠Click on the bitmap file filed, a small arrow will appear ⢠Click on the arrow in order to select the desire fabric pattern. ⢠Select the type of the graphic file (choose between: BMP, JPG, PSD and more) ⢠Click on the desired file, the preview of the pattern will show on the dialog box. ⢠Click OK ⢠The material files save box will appear ⢠Enter the file name in the Material Info File field. Mark Manual238 ⢠Click SAVE To change the marker material type. ⢠Open the piece info dialog box from the piece menu (you can use Ctrl + I as shortcut). ⢠Chose the new material type from the material field. ⢠Click apply ⢠The marker will apply the pattern connected to this material type Chapter 5: Marker Menu 239 Stripe Definition This command is used to define stripes, plaids, or floral prints on the marker, simulating a repeated design. The Stripe Definition option is used when you are marking material with a special design that must appear on the piece in a specific place. It ensures that the piece will be cut correctly with the repeated design. ! Note: The auto-nesting procedure does not take the Stripe Definition option into account. To Define Stripes: ⢠In the Marker Menu, select Stripe Definition. The Stripes Definitions dialog box is displayed. ! Tip: The Stripe Adjust option located in the Options Menu must be enabled. ⢠Verify or change the selected parameters. Mark Manual240 ⢠Click Ok. ! Note: Select the Hide Stripes option in the Options Menu to display only a fraction of the horizontal and vertical lines around the border of the marker. Stripes Definitions Dialog Box: Start X The Start X distance value defines the beginning of the first X stripe (plaid). This is measured from the left edge of the marker. Start Y The Start Y distance value defines the beginning of the first Y stripe. This is measured from the bottom line of the marker. Chapter 5: Marker Menu 241 Distance The distance between the vertical stripes (plaid lines). Angle From Vertical (deg) If an angle other than 90 degrees is needed, enter the desired value. Distance The distance between the horizontal stripes. Angle From Horizontal (deg) If an angle other than 180 degrees is needed, enter the desired value. A, B, C, D Measurements These measurements could be use to define diagonal stripes instead of entering values for angles. Stripe Adjust According To Set Only If unchecked, the next bundle placed will match in the same way that the previous bundle of the same size matched. If checked, the next bundle placed will not match the stripes unlike the previous one. Revise Pieces Placements on Marker Use this option to maintain pieces strips while you send your marker to windows printer. Mark Manual242 To Add or Edit Stripe Adjust Notches or Buttons ⢠Decide which pieces in your DSN file match. ⢠Mark the match point on the pieces with notches or buttons. ⢠The Notches and Buttons must be assigned Stripe Adjust numbers. To ensure that all future markers receive the same stripe adjust numbers, it is best to make the notch and button edits in OptiGrade. If the attributes were not specified with OptiGrade, you can use the Notch icon to edit the stripe adjust number in OptiMark. ⢠Numbers 1 through 4 can be used for stripe adjust numbers. The match points that line up must be assigned the same stripe adjust number and notch or button type. For example, if the side seams of the front and back should line up, add the same type of notch on both pieces in the matching location, and assign a stripe adjust number of one. If the front has a patch pocket that lines up on the right side, add a button to the front and to the pocket, and assign a stripe adjust number of one or two. ! Note: Matching points can also be defined using the Fabric and Stripes command in OptiGrade. ⢠When the first piece is placed in the marker, the second piece will look at the first piece to determine where it needs to be located. All pieces placed on the marker which have the same notch number will be placed at the same coordinates of each repeated stripe as the first piece. ⢠When stripe adjust according to sets is disabled, the next bundle placed will match in the same way that the previous bundle of the same size matched. When stripe adjust according to sets in Chapter 5: Marker Menu 243 enabled, the next bundle placed will match any way that the user requests. If stripe adjust according to sets in enabled and the first bundle placed was Related to Stripes, the next bundle placed will match in the same way that the previous bundle of the same size matched. ⢠You cannot have several like notches with the same stripe numbers on the same piece. You can have different notches (V, Uâs etc.) with the same stripe numbers on the same piece. ! Note: If you would like the stripe adjust point (notch or button) to match to a particular stripe junction, follow the To Relate Pieces (With Stripe Adjust Notches Or Buttons) To A Stripe instructions later in this chapter Relate Piece to Stripes (Shift+Home) This function is used to lock a piece to a specific area on the fabric. ! Note: The auto-nesting procedure will not relate pieces to stripes. Numbers 1 through 4 are used for stripe adjust numbers. The match points that line up must be assigned the same stripe adjust number and notch or button type. For example, if the side seams of the front and back should line up, add the same type of notch on both pieces in the matching location and assign a stripe adjust number of one. If the front has a patch pocket that lines up on the right side, add a button to the front and to the pocket, and assign a stripe adjust number of one or two. All pieces placed on the marker which have the same notch number will be placed at the same coordinates of each repeated stripe as the first piece. There cannot be several like notches with the same stripe numbers on the same piece, however, different notches (V, Uâs etc.) can appear with the same stripe numbers on the same piece. Mark Manual244 To Relate Pieces (Without Stripe Adjust Notches or Buttons) To a Stripe: ⢠Define the stripe distances using the Stripe Definition command in the Marker Menu. ! Note: The distance is always measured from the selected point to the closest stripe line down (Y distance) and to the left (X distance). Select test to view the step amount before making the changes. ⢠In the Options Menu, enable the Stripe Adjust option. ⢠Place the pieces on the marker area. ⢠When working with a piece that must be adjusted to a specific stripe junction, place it in the correct location. ⢠In the Marker Menu, select Relate Pieces To Stripes or press Shift + Home. The Relate Pieces to Stripes dialog box is displayed. A point on the piece will be shown with a X. This X is the matching point. To change the matching points use the arrows in the dialog box and move the X around the piece. ⢠Type the distance of the highlighted point from the X and Y stripes. ⢠Click Ok. To Relate Pieces (With Stripe Adjust Notches Or Buttons) To a Stripe: Place a notch or button with numbers from 1 to 4 at a specific distance to a stripe junction. These values can be determined for either the X or Y directions. ⢠Define the stripe distances using the Stripe Definition option in the Marker Menu. Chapter 5: Marker Menu 245 ! Note: The distance is always from the selected point to the closest stripe line down (Y distance) and to the left (X distance). Select test to view the step amount before making the changes. ⢠In the Options Menu select the Stripe Adjust option. ⢠Place the first pieces on the marker area. All pieces placed on the marker which have the same stripe adjust number will be placed at the same coordinate as the first piece. ⢠If the first piece placed should be located on a specific stripe line, place the piece in the approximate desired location. ⢠In the Marker Menu, Select Relate Pieces To Stripes or press Shift +Home. The Relate Pieces to Stripes dialog box is displayed. A point on the piece will be shown with a X. This X is the matching point. To change the matching points use the arrows in the dialog box and move the X around the piece. ⢠Type the distance of the highlighted point from the X and Y stripes. ⢠Click Ok. ! Note: The distance is always from the selected notch or button to the closest stripe line in X distance and in Y distance. The notch and button numbers, which you see in the dialog box, refer to the available notches. Match ++ ⢠Match ++ is a completely automatic nesting system for matching pieces to stripes and plaid fabrics. Match ++ is ideal for any product with matched Mark Manual246 fabric requirement. It is a powerful tool for working with striped and plaided fabrics, railroad or flow matched fabrics. Math ++ combines highly advanced mathematic algorithm together with artificial intelligences methods. The speed of Match ++ makes it beneficial for estimating pre-production costing as wall as manual and automated production cutting. Match ++ offers a quick and affordable way to save both time and money. The match ++ will start automatically when starting automatic nesting and if the stripe adjust option in the option menu is checked. To run the match ++ module: ⢠From the MARKER menu select the stripe definition command to define the plaids and stripes on the marker. ⢠From the OPTION menu check the STRIPE ADJUST Command in order to display stripes on the marker. ⢠From the NESTING menu click on the START AUTO-NEST command. ⢠The MATCH ++ dialog box will display. Enter in the maximum nesting time in minutes. Chapter 5: Marker Menu 247 ⢠Click OK. The automatic nesting process will act according to the adjust commands which assigned to the pieces. Undo (Ctrl+Z) The Undo command reverses the most recent changes. This command cancels the last 20 operations step by step. Redo (Ctrl+Y) Use the Redo command to inverse the most recent action. This command cancels the last 20 operations, one at a time. Mark Manual248 Chapter 6: Group Menu 249 Chapter 6: Group Menu The Group Menu allows the user to treat several pattern pieces on the marker as one unit. The pieces will move as a group until a different piece is selected. All of the grouped pieces will move simultaneously by clicking inside one of the grouped objects and dragging it to the desired location. Most commands and tools that work on one piece will also work on a group of pattern pieces. To Create a Group: ⢠Click and drag a box around the selected pieces on the marker OR press and hold the Shift key while clicking selected pieces to be grouped. A minimum of two pieces is required to create a group. ! Note: Folded pieces in tubular markers cannot be part of a grouped section Substitute size for selected pieces Substitute sizes for selected pieces command enable the user to substitute placed pieces size without nesting again pieces. You can replace placed pieces size simply: ⢠Select the piece/pieces on the piece display bar. ⢠Go to group menu Substitute size for selected pieces command (you can use F9 shortcut). ⢠All the selected pieces will change their size to a bigger size on you size list. If your selected pieces size is already the biggest size in size list, the selected pieces size will change to smallest size on you size list. Mark Manual250 ! Note: Itâs recommended to run âRenestâ command from nesting menu after you replaced placed pieces size. Keep The Keep function groups selected pieces together. The grouped pieces will be display with a dashed line around them on the Marker and will display as their own piece on the Piece Display Bar. This group can be placed and manipulated on the marker as if it were a single piece. To Keep a Group: ⢠Click and drag a box around the selected pieces on the marker OR press and hold the Shift key while clicking selected pieces to be grouped. ⢠From the Grouping Menu, select Keep. Chapter 6: Group Menu 251 ! Note: After placing a âkeptâ group, the pieces will move as a group until a different piece is selected or another group is placed. Ungroup The Ungroup function disables grouped pieces. Once the Ungroup command is selected, the group will no longer be displayed in the Piece Display Bar and the individual pieces will return to their original Piece Display Boxes. To Ungroup Pieces: ⢠Select the group to disable. ⢠In the Grouping Menu, select Ungroup. Fix on Marker The Fix On Marker function permanently groups pattern pieces on the marker until the group is disabled with one of the Unfix functions. When part of the fixed group is selected, the whole group will highlight and move as a single object. To Fix a Group on the Marker ⢠Click and drag a box around the selected pieces on the marker OR press and hold the Shift key while clicking selected pieces to be grouped. ⢠In the Grouping Menu, select Fix On Marker. Unfix Selected All pieces that were in the selected group will be disabled and can be placed individually on the marker. Mark Manual252 To Unfix a Selected Group on the Marker: ⢠Select the group or groups to disable. ⢠In the Grouping Menu, select Unfix Selected. Unfix All Select the Unfix All command to release the all fixed groups on a marker. ⢠In the Grouping Menu, select Unfix All. Stripe Adjust Group (Ctrl+G) This command is used to ensure that if a piece is re-positioned within the floral, stripe, or plaid marker area, the piece will match to the other placed pieces. To Create a Stripe Adjust Group ⢠Position the pieces that relate to one another on the marker area. ⢠Select the group of pieces. ⢠In the Grouping Menu, select Stripe Adjust Group. When a piece in the Stripe Adjust Group is moved, the piece will always snap to a similar location. Chapter 6: Group Menu 253 Rectangular Block Fuse (Ctrl+B) The Block Fuse function creates separate Fusing (Cutting) zones. ⢠Select the pattern piece or pieces from which to create a block fuse. ⢠In the Grouping Menu, select Block Fuse. Only pieces that were marked entirely in the box would be included in the block. ! Note: A folded piece can not be block fused. When Plot is selected in the File Menu, the Block Fusing dialog box is displayed. Mark Manual254 ⢠The All Nested Pieces function plots all the pieces with the drawn blocks. ⢠The Marker Without Blocks function plots the marker without the blocks drawn. ⢠The Marker With Block Spaces functions plots the marker with block spaces. ⢠The Contain All Blocks function plots only the contents of the blocks. ⢠The Contain of Selected Block function plots selected block fuses. Chapter 6: Group Menu 255 Thrifty Block Fuse This feature enables the user to create a "thrifty" block fusing as opposed to a rectangle block fusing; this limits fabric waste and the user can still create a block fusing on selected pieces. ⢠Click and drag a box around the area you want to create a thrifty block fuse from. ⢠Choose from âGroupingâ menu âThrifty Fuseâ option. Only pieces that were marked entirely in the box would be included in the block. ! Note: Thrifty fuse will be disabled to a folded piece. Optimum Block Fuse This feature ables the user to create an "optimize" block fusing according to the selected piece shape, allows for following the selected piece contours so the user can decrease the fabric waste while creating a block fusing. Click and drag a box around the area you want to create a block fuse from. Choose from âGroupingâ menu âOptimum Block Fuseâ option. Only pieces that were marked entirely in the box would be included in the block Select Whole Bundle This command enables the user to select a complete bundle by selecting any piece within the bundle Mark Manual256 Unify Pieces Orientation This command enables the user to unify piece orientations within bundle according to one selected piece orientation within the bundle. Substitute One Bundle This command allows the user to substitute one bundle with another bundle. This is very useful in cases where a mistake has been made in one bundle. Copy Size for Selected Pieces This command allows the user to select several pieces and copy the size for all of them at the same time. ``Chapter 7: Display Menu 257 Chapter 7: View Menu Pieces on Marker Select the Pieces on Marker command to determine the specific information that is displayed on the screen and printed on output. To Display Pieces on Marker: ⢠In the Options Menu, select Pieces on Marker. The Display Pieces on Marker dialog box is displayed. ⢠Select the desired options. ⢠Click OK. ! Note: If the box to the left of the option is checked, it will be displayed on screen and printed on output. Click once to place a check and select the option. Click again to remove the check. Display Pieces on Marker Dialog Box: Mark Manual258 Pieces Tab: Pieces Original Contour If checked, the original contour of the pattern piece is visible on the screen. This option is used mainly on a buffered piece when only the buffered contour should be displayed and printed. Buffered Contour If checked, the buffered contour of the pattern piece is visible on the screen. This option is used on a buffered piece when the buffered contour should be displayed and printed. ! Note: There are several ways to display a piece or pattern buffer. The original piece can be displayed, the buffer only can be displayed, or both the original piece and the buffer can be displayed together on screen. ! Tip: See Edit Piece and Piece Info in the Piece Menu to learn how to add and remove buffering. Fill with Color (Ctrl+F) If checked, a particular size will Fill With Color. Colors are set in the Options Menu. If there are no color set, the default color will be used. Colors According to Bundles If checked, the pattern piece is displayed in color according to set or bundle. When the Colors According to Sets command is unchecked, the piece color will be displayed according to size. Colors are set in the Options Menu. ``Chapter 7: Display Menu 259 Text in Real Scale If checked, the text and descriptions is displayed on the screen with the same scale that the text will plot. When Text in Real Scale command is unchecked, the text and descriptions will display on the screen so that it is readable. Descriptions: Style Name If checked, the style name specified in the Order for Marker Making dialog box is displayed on the screen and printed on output. The Order for Marker Making dialog box is displayed when loading a Design file from the File Menu. Piece Name Determines whether or not the piece names specified in the Piece Info dialog box will be displayed on the piece with the output. Piece Code If checked, the Piece Codes specified in the Piece Info dialog box is displayed on the screen and printed on output. Piece Description If checked, the Piece Description specified in the Piece Info dialog box is displayed on the screen and printed on output. Size Name If checked, the Size Name is displayed on the screen and printed on output. Mark Manual260 Bundle Code Determines whether or not this the set/bundle name displays on the piece with output Placementâs Info: Tilt Angle If checked the amount that each piece has been rotated or tilted is displayed on the screen and printed on output. Internals Tab Objects: Notches If checked, the notches are displayed on the screen and printed on output. Points (Buttons) If checked, drill holes are displayed on the screen and printed on output. Buttons with Cut, Drill, or Aux. Drill attributes will plot as a circle approximately 3/8â in diameter. Buttons with a Draw attribute will plot as a circle with a cross hair in the center. Notch and Point Numbers If checked, the Stripe Adjust numbers are displayed on the screen and printed on output. Tools/ Layers Determines whether or not the Tools or Layers will be displayed on the piece with output ``Chapter 7: Display Menu 261 Internals By Tools: Draw, Sew All internals that will be drawn with the pen tool are displayed with a common on the screen and printed on output. Cut (punch) All internals that will be cut with the cut tool are displayed with a common on the screen and printed on output. Drill (aux drill) All buttons and notches that will be cut with the drill tool are displayed with a common color on the screen and printed on output. Quality All internals that are defined with a Quality attribute are displayed with a common color on the screen and printed on output. None All internals that are defined with a None attribute are displayed with a common color on the screen and printed on output. Internals: Baseline If checked, the baseline is displayed on the screen and printed on output. Mark Manual262 Contours, Lines, Arcs, Circles If checked, the internal point lines, draft lines, and circles are displayed on the screen and printed on output. Pleats If checked, the pleat and axis lines are displayed on the screen and printed on output. Darts If checked, the dart points and dart apex are displayed on the screen and printed on output. The dart in OptiMark is not displayed or printed as a fully drawn dart. Text If checked, the internal text on a piece is displayed on the screen and printed on output. This text can be helpful when including last minute instructions to the operator. This does not effect the text found in the Descriptions section of this dialog box. ``Chapter 7: Display Menu 263 Cut/Plot Order The Cut/Plot Order displays the order in which the pattern pieces will be cut or plotted. Double click the right mouse button on a blank area of the marker to check and uncheck this option. The Cut/Plot Order can be changed using the Optimize Cutting Order and Selected Piece Cutting Order commands in the Marker menu. Stripes Lines If checked, the stripes on the marker are hidden. When this command is activated, only a hint of the stripe around the edge of the marker is displayed. Marker Full Length If checked, the entire length of the marker is scaled to fit on the screen. If unchecked, the width of the marker is scaled as wide as possible on the screen. Right and left scroll bars are displayed to so the length of the marker can be viewed. Mark Manual264 Zoom All Pieces on Marker If checked, the marker area containing placed pieces will be scaled to fit on the screen. Piece Bar Select this command to display the Piece Display Bar. Size Lists Select this command to display the Size List box. The size list box is located below the Piece Display Bar. = 90° Rotation allowed (4 way) = 180° Rotation allowed (2 way) = All Rotation allowed (anyway) = Up/Down Folding allowed = Left/Right Folding allowed ``Chapter 7: Display Menu 265 = Locked piece for Automatic nesting = Buffer is declared = Remaining pieces after pliesâ calculations = Final Placement for Automatic nesting = Filling Holes as default for Automatic nesting = Mirror allowed ! Note: If there are more than five (5) sizes, use the up/down arrows to scroll through the sizes. Mark Manual266 Spread Marker Select this command to display Spread Marker. All the pieces are displayed along the top of the marker with the quantity and size name. ! Note: If the piece quantity is zero, the piece will be without color (if there is a color) and the piece contour will be dash line. ! Tip: You can also drag or use double click command to bring pieces that are located on the spreading table to the working area. Piece List If checked, the Piece List dialog box is displayed. The first column of the Piece List dialog box represents the piece number, the second column represents the piece name, the third column is used for the size name, and the fourth column represents the number or pieces still left to be placed. Use the scroll bars to scroll up and down the dialog box. To place a piece from the Piece List dialog box, double click on the piece name you would like to place. ``Chapter 7: Display Menu 267 Zoom View Window The zoom view window helps you to specify the zoom spot. The zoom view window displays the full length marker and on the marker itself you will see the zoom area. Use the hand cursor to drew the zoom rectangle Tool Bars If checked a list of Toolbars is displayed allowing the user to manipulate which Toolbars are displayed. In the toolbar dialog box, the user can choose between large or small buttons (icons), ToolTips enabled or disabled, and the conventional appearance or the new âcool look.â Mark Manual268 New Toolbar OptiMark gives you the option to create toolbars and customize them to yours needs. To create and customize toolbar give the toolbar name and click o.k. ``Chapter 7: Display Menu 269 Customize OptiMark gives you the option to create toolbars and customize hem to yours needs. You can customize an original or new toolbar: Reset Click on this button to reset the highlight toolbar name. The toolbar will back to the original form. Mark Manual270 View the Status Bar This command will display or hide the Status Bar line (in the marker bottom). ! Tip: to edit the information on the status bar select the Preference dialog box in the Option menu. Chapter 8: Options Menu 271 Chapter 8: Options Menu The Options menu allows the user to set up the screen according to their preference. Stripe Adjust This command acts as an on/off toggle switch when working with Stripe, Plaid, and floral material. When activated, all same-type pieces will be adjusted to match the relative stripe coordinates of the first piece placed on the marker. The matching point for the pieces are determined by using notches or buttons with stripe adjust numbers from 1 to 4 or by using the Stripe Adjust Group (see Marker Menu for Stripe Definition and Relate Pieces to Stripes commands and Group menu for Stripe Adjust Group). !!!! Note: If several pieces in a style have the same stripe adjust number, all pieces will be adjusted to the same relative position. Single Piece Gap This command acts as an on/off toggle switch when working with a predefined Single Gap. To define a Single Gap, select Preferences in the Options Menu and enter a value in the Single Gap field. Mark Manual272 Single gap enables temporary Gap (Buffer) around a single piece during manual mouse: Slide or Shooting. The Gap is created during the Shoot function and will stay with the piece. For permanent Gap, use the Gap function in the âPreferenceâ dialog box. The Gap value is defined in the âMarkerâ menu at the âpreferencesâ dialog box. To enable or disable the function use the command âSingle Piece Gapâ from the âOptionâ menu. Chapter 8: Options Menu 273 Limit Rotation This command acts as an on/off toggle switch for using the rotation and flipping limits defined in the Piece Info, All Sizes Info and the Global Piece Info dialog boxes. If unchecked, the pieces act as if no rotation limits have been defined. Round After Rotation The Round After Rotation command acts as an on/off toggle switch to control the manual rotation value of a piece when rotating with the mouse. When the command is activated, the piece will jump to the nearest 90-degree angle (within a range of 8 degrees from the initial position). Mark Manual274 Colors This option specifies different colors for the OptiMark elements. To Choose General and Size Colors: ⢠In the Options Menu, select Colors. The Color Selection dialog box is displayed. ⢠Select the Object Type you want to change General, Sizes, or Bundles. Chapter 8: Options Menu 275 ⢠Select an item to change the color. The item name is displayed in the Object Name field. ⢠Select a color from the color palette displayed in the dialog box. ⢠Click OK. Many colors can be changed before exiting this dialog box. In your OptiMark or Windows directory, there is a file called OPTIMARK.CLR. This file contains the color definitions for OptiMark and OptiGrade. To Define Bundle Names and Colors: ⢠In the Options Menu select Colors. The Color Selection dialog box is displayed. ⢠Select Sizes and select the size to define bundles for. ⢠Select Bundles and in the Object Name field type the name of the first bundle. ⢠Select ADD. ⢠Select the color of your choice for the first bundle. ⢠Repeat steps 3 through 5 adding each bundle for the selected size. ⢠Repeat steps 2 through 6 to define bundles for each size. ⢠Select OK. Mark Manual276 Fonts The Choose Fonts dialog box allows the user to customize the program to suit their particular needs. Once a new font is selected the piece text or general selections will be updated immediately. Marker fonts prefer (TT) True Type fonts. It is important to have the correct fonts and printer driver for your printer so that the correct font size and format print. For some printers it is crucial to install the original printer driver and not a substitute. While regular printer fonts are specific and supplied by Windows, the output font to the plotter is a vector text, which is supported by OptiMark. !!!! Note: This command uses the fonts found in your Windows directory. The font type can be changed in the OptiMark or OptiGrade section of the OPTIKAD.INI and saved to the file in the same directory. The different font styles appear in the OPTIKAD.INI file. It is possible to edit this file with a text editor like Windows Notepad, which creates an ASCII file. Text output to the plotter or printer can be different from the text, which is displayed on the screen. Plotter fonts are available in different languages by using the appropriate PLOTTER.FNT file. For complete output support in all text options and languages, use the PLOTTER.FNT file. !!!! Note: OptiMark supports text rotation, but not mirrored text, because Windows does not support mirrored text. !!!! Note: Mirrored text is supported on the plotter with our own fonts, or by plotters which have a built-in mirror fonts option. The plot file is sent to the plotter with this option. Chapter 8: Options Menu 277 To Select or Change a Font: ⢠In the Options menu, select Fonts. The Choose Fonts dialog box is displayed. ⢠Select the type of font you want to change. The respective Font dialog box will be displayed. ⢠Select the desired font style and size. ⢠Click Apply. Click OK to exit the Font dialogs box. ⢠Click Close in the Choose Fonts dialog box. Choose Fonts Dialog Box: Mark Manual278 Restore Default changes all displayed font types, styles, and sizes to the factory settings. !!!! Note: In your OptiMark or Windows directory, you should have a file called WIN.INI. This file contains the font definitions for OptiMark and OptiGrade. Working Units Working Units specify whether measurement type will be used in the software. The types include millimeters, centimeters, meters, inches, feet, or yards. The default working units appear in the OPTIKAD.INI file. While using Import or Export of Cad Cam files different working unit can be defined, but the change will be applicable only for the Import and Export options. Chapter 8: Options Menu 279 Preferences This dialog box is used to define Options related to OptiMark. Status Line Tab: The information to be displayed in the status line at the bottom of the screen. Check each element to display in the status line and uncheck to exclude. Mark Manual280 Options Tab: Check Style files before Opening If this option is checked OptiMark will compare the date of the most recent design file to the date of the design file used to make the existing marker file before opening an existing marker file. If the dates are different a dialog box will display. Use the first piece name as Style file name Use this command when the style file is without a name. The software will be using the first piece names as style file name. !!!! Note: If unchecked, style files without names will be stay without names. Merge Marker Vertically If checked, markers will be merged side by side (default) or one over the other. Chapter 8: Options Menu 281 Multi Line Piece Description Check this box to enable piece description to be more then one line Bubble Info The bubble info can used to give a description of pieces with no need to open the attribute box. The bubble info pops up when the mouse courser points on the elements. Check this box to enable the bubble info. Auto Extract from Intersections Use this option to avoid intersection while nesting manually. In case of intersection the nested piece will âjumpâ from placed piece. Notch Depth Sets the default Notch Depth for all notches that are added using the Notch tool in OptiMark. Notch Width Sets the default Notch Width for all notches that are added using the Notch tool in OptiMark. Button Size Sets the default Button Size for all buttons on the pattern pieces. Text Size Sets the default Text Size for all text added using the Text tool in OptiMark. Mark Manual282 General Tab: Auto Save Interval Define the time interval for the automatic save for your files. The AutoSave option saves only the file that is currently open. It creates a backup titled BACKUP.DSP. The BACKUP.DSP file can be opened through the Open Marker File dialog box. This file can be opened if you forget to save a file before shutting the system down or if the system is shut down incorrectly. After loading the backup and inspecting its contents you can save it again under the original file name. The directory in which your BACKUP.DSP file is saved is determined in your OPTIKAD.INI file. When installing the program for the first time, you will be asked where you want to place your \TEXWORK\EXAMPLES directory. This is where your BACKUP.DSP will be located. Chapter 8: Options Menu 283 The AutoSave command is not intended to make backup copies of your files. It is designed to create a single backup copy of the file you are currently working on if your system crashes or is improperly shut down. Move step by cursor key Define the jump step value for moving a piece on the marker by the keyboard cursor. Tilt Step Use this area to define the amount a piece should be rotated each F11 and F12 is selected. To define the maximum amount that a single piece can be tilted, refer to the Piece Info dialog box. Block Buffer Size This command is used to define your Block buffer size when you use the âBlock Fuseâ command in the Grouping menu. The âBlock Fuseâ command is used to define the cutting area around selected pieces. To define the Block buffer size around your selected pieces (the frame around the pieces), go to the Preferences dialog (in the option menu) to âBlock buffer sizeâ and fill in the desirable size to the Block buffer. Adjust Gap Sets a constant default gap between pieces when the Adjust, Adjust Rotate, and Insert to Hole tools are used in the marker area. Single Piece Gap Sets the gap between pieces when the Adjust, Adjust Rotate, and Insert to Hole tools are used in the marker area. The Single Piece Gap must be checked in the Options Menu for this function to be applied on the marker. Mark Manual284 Log File Tab: Chapter 8: Options Menu 285 Log File This option writes Marker information to a log file that contains information about the marker, number of pieces placed, and material usage. The log file can then be used for tracking what was plotted. To view the log file, use a text editor or select Solutions Reports from the Nesting menu. Click on the Browse button to locate where the log file will be saved. Mark Manual286 Post Saving Action /Export to ASCII Application The program Exp2asci.exe is a small application that will enable the user to read the header information of OptiTex DSN and DSP files. The Exp2asci will convert the header information to an ASCII format, which will enable it to be read by electronic spreadsheet (Excel, Lotus 1-2-3, Quattro etc.). The program works in Win95 environment and can be run from DOS prompt and from Windows Run or Explore. By changing the Properties parameter you can run this program every time you send a file. The main screen looks like this: The user should fill two fields (if they are empty) and press Start. The program keeps the name of your previous output file and uses it next time by default. It uses the name of current DSP or DSN file. The program reads the input file and appends the information to the output file. It is possible to convert many files in one session. In order to end a work session press End. The program will not start if one of two fields is empty. Error messages: Chapter 8: Options Menu 287 Please check that the input file does exist and full path is correct. The file exists but it is currently used by another application. The Exp2asci program canât work with it. Please close the file or select other name for output file. To Disable the Post Saving Action uncheck Run this Application after Save AutoSave (Backup) file Locate the place in your hard drive to save the backup file by clicking on the browse button. Mark Manual288 Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 289 Chapter 9: Nesting Menu The Nesting menu includes commands for automatic nesting solutions. Stop When the automatic process begins, a clock icon will be displayed indicating that automatic placement is in process. To stop the Auto-nesting procedure, choose Stop from the Nesting menu. The Nesting process will be halted and only those pieces already nested will stay on the marker. The Auto-nesting procedure stops only after the current piece is placed on the marker. In cases where the current piece is complicated, or the solution task is very large, it may take some time to stop the Auto-nesting procedure. Once the Auto-nesting procedure has been halted the user may change the Piece Attributes, move the nested pieces and place new pieces. The new attributes will be taken into account when the Auto-nesting procedure is resumed. Select Continue from the Nesting menu to resume the nesting in progress. To Stop Auto-nesting: ⢠In the Nesting Menu, select Stop. Continue This command enables the user to place some pieces on the marker and let OptiMark place the rest of the pieces. Select the Continue command to resume the automatic nesting procedure after auto nesting has been stopped. To Continue Nesting: ⢠In the Nesting Menu, select Continue. Mark Manual290 !!!! Note: OptiMark will continue nesting pieces. If the Fill Holes option is enabled, OptiMark will check the previously placed pieces and fill all necessary holes before continuing. !!!! Tip: Ctrl+Alt+S continues the nesting process without filling holes. Start AutoNesting This command starts the automatic nesting procedure. !!!! Note: This option requires an empty marker. If there are pieces already on the marker you will be asked to clear it. To Start Auto-Nest: ⢠In the Nesting Menu, select Start AutoNesting. The marker will begin filling with pieces and will continue until all pieces in the file have been placed. To stop the Auto-nesting in process, select Stop from the Nesting Menu. Refer to the explanation earlier in this chapter for more information on stopping the Auto-nesting in process. Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 291 Auto Nest Selected Pieces To activate this command, at least two sizes and/or pieces must be selected in the Piece Display Bar. Only the pieces and sizes selected will be autonested. !!!! Note: To select multiple pieces and/or sizes in the Piece Display Bar, hold down the shift key and select each piece and/or size in the Piece Display Bar. Auto Nesting To Separate Block This feature provides the ability to nest pieces from the same sets/bundles in separate blocks and dividing the marker table to separate stripes according to piece's sets/bundles. Renest Pieces on marker This option is available only with Nest++⢠module. Use Renest Pieces on marker option to nest with Nest++⢠pieces that already are placed on the working area. Compact Arrangement Allows to for the most compact arrangement of pieces on the Marker. Mark Manual292 Click Ctrl+J to get better nesting result after the automating nesting had finished. Duplicate Marker Select the Duplicate Marker command to duplicate all currently placed pieces. With this command, the duplication will be made up to the marker limit, which is defined in the Marker Definitions command in the Marker menu. The Duplicate Marker command may create a situation where there are not enough pieces to fill the entire marker. In this case the number of pieces will be increased and appear as a negative (-) number, you will have remainders cut. Auto Nesting Setup The AutoNest Setup enables the user to select one way of the nesting option from several options. It is also possible to create a list of markers to nest and compare the results with different material width. A comparison table will be created for verification purposes. Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 293 Standard Auto nesting produces better marker efficiencies by allowing the system the time needed to create a good nest. Nest++ Is an optional add-on application to OptiMark with fantastic result. The efficiency is based on the duration that the automatic algorithm will run. The average time needed to get a good nest should last about 15 minutes for a marker with 50 to 80 pieces. A good nesting can be reached also after 2 or 3 minutes. Quick The Quick command enables OptiMark to nest the pieces as quickly as possible. OptiMark will not spend a lot of time trying to find the best possible efficiency. Nesting According to Bundles While the Nesting According to Sets command is enabled, OptiMark will nest the pieces by sets/bundles and sizes. OptiMark will mix pieces from different sets, but will do its best to complete one set first before moving to the next set. When this command is disabled, OptiMark will place pieces according to the square area of the piece, placing larger pieces first. Unify Orientation Within Bundles This feature enables you to unify piece orientation within bundles or set in order to create a complete bundle/set with the same orientation while using Nest ++. Mark Manual294 Unlimited Marker Length The Nest++ will ignore the marker length as it display in the marker definitions. Check this box to assure that all the pieces will fit in to the marker. " Nest ++ "will find the best nesting solution and the shorter marker. Auto Save of Markers Enabling the Auto Save of Markers command will divide one order into several markers when necessary. Reasons to use this feature include: when the fabric can only be spread so long due to shading, lack of spreading tables, or the fabric is sold in sheets. If the autonesting marker becomes full (no additional pieces can be placed within the marker limits) then a second marker will be created. The marker limit is defined in the Marker Definitions command in the Marker Menu. The new marker will be given a name that is similar to the initial file name, but the last two letters will be changed to a dash (-) and a number. For example, if the original file is titled MARKER.DSP, all overflow files will be given the name(s) MARKER-1.DSP, MARKER-2.DSP and so on. There are two options with the Auto Save of Markers command. ⢠Save the placed (full) marker with all the unplaced pieces listed in the Piece Display Bar. The next marker will also list the previously placed pieces in the Piece Display Bar. ⢠Save the placed (full) marker with zero remainders listed in the Piece Display Bar. The next marker will list only the unplaced pieces in the Piece Display Bar. !!!! Note: The same option exists in the File menu with the Save Current Nesting command. Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 295 To Enable Auto Save of Markers ⢠In the Nesting Menu, select Auto Save of Markers. The Save Current Nesting dialog is displayed. ⢠Enter the file name. ⢠Click OK. !!!! Tip: If the original marker was saved with zero remainders, the original remainders can be updated. Select Open Design Files from the File menu, double click on each of the Design files listed and select OK. Save Current Nesting Dialog Box: Browse Click on the Browse button to specify a name for the original DSP (marker) file. The additional DSP files will have the same name followed by a hyphen and a number. Mark Manual296 Write Reports to File Enabling this option will allow the marker information to be reported to the log file each time a marker is saved or plotted. Click on Change Log to specify a name for the ASCII log file. Create NST-file (cncKad) too NST is one of the file formats that are used in the âcncKadâ system. By enabling this command, a NST file will automatically be created each time the DSP file is saved. Save only nested parts (and zero remainders) When this command is enabled, the original marker will be saved with zero remainders, only the new marker will have the unplaced pieces listed in the Piece Display Bar. Compact Arrangement (Ctrl J) Allows to for the most compact arrangement of pieces on the Marker. Duplicate Marker Select the Duplicate Marker command to duplicate all currently placed pieces. With this command, the duplication will be made up to the marker limit, which is defined in the Marker Definitions command in the Marker menu. The Duplicate Marker command may create a situation where there are not enough pieces in the Piece Display Bar to fill the entire marker. In this case the number of pieces will be increased allowing remainders to be cut and a negative (-) number will be placed in the Piece Display Bar. Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 297 Solutions Reports Select the Solutions Reports command to view and/or print a report. The information in this *.LOG file includes details of the saved markers. One LOG file can include reports for many different files. The LOG file is an ASCII file, where each piece of information appears with a specific key letter allowing you to send the information to other applications. The LOG file can be defined in the Save Current nesting command in the File Menu or the Auto Save of Markers in the Nesting Menu. !!!! Note: To create a log file checks first the âWrite reports to fileâ box in Preferences dialog box under the Options Menu. To View and Print the Log File: ⢠Select Solutions Reports from the Nesting Menu. ⢠Use the Browse button to ensure that the correct log file is displayed. Mark Manual298 Solutions Reports Dialog Box This dialog box displays the date, length, width, number of plies, efficiency, and spreading layout for each saved marker. The most recently saved marker will be displayed at the top of the list. Total The total button is used to view an average efficiency and total number of plies for a selected group of saved markers. Hold down the shift key to select the markers you would like to average and select the total button. Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 299 Print The Print button is used to generate a printed report of the displayed log file. Details Select one marker from the log file listed and click Details. The solutions report details dialog box for the selected marker is displayed. Solutions Report Details Dialog Box Selected Design File A drop down box is displayed listing all the design files in the current marker. Detailed information about the selected design file is displayed in the boxes below. Mark Manual300 Top Box This field displays the total area and perimeter for all pieces in each size. Bottom Box This area displays the total area and perimeter for each piece and size. Print All Print All will print a report for each design file contained in the selected marker file. This option is enable only when two or more markers were merged (File Menu, select Merge Several Markers option.) In the Solution Report dialog box: ⢠Select the last file from the Solution File Name list. ⢠Click on the Details button. ⢠Click on the Print All buttons. Print Print will print a report of the selected design file contained in the selected marker file. Start Batch Rather than use the menus, a batch files can be created to request markers, auto- nest, import files, export files, and plot files. A Batch holds a series of commands, each of which are divided, into three sections: the command, a message attached to the command, and a value. The use of the Batch Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 301 Command files enables a set of commands to be executed by OptiMark without an operator at the computer. To Start a Batch: ⢠In the Nesting menu select Start Batch. The Batch dialog box is displayed. ⢠Enter the File Name or select Browse to find the desired file. !!!! Note: It is recommended that OptiMark Batch Command files be created with a .BTF extension. Message-files have a .MSG extension. ⢠Enter the message to accompany the file or select Browse to find the desired message. ⢠Select or enter the desired information and click OK. ⢠Click OK to exit the Batch dialogs box. !!!! Tip: Select Import setup to display the Import setup dialog box. Mark Manual302 To Create a Batch Command File: A Batch can hold a series of commands, each of which is divided, into three sections: the command, a message attached to the command, and a value. Listed below is a list of the various Batch commands. @ [[/]=] ... [; ] or ; Batch Commands: @! or @EOF End of Batch-file performing. Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 303 @PAU[SE] Stop of Batch process. Use menu to continue. [/MSG=] Must not content â,â and â>â symbols. @SET Sets value to OPTICAD.INI - file. /SEC[TION]=/KEY[WORD]= /VAL[UE]= @UNI[T] Set working units. /CM | /MM | ME[TER] | /IN[CH] | /FE[ET] | /YA[RD] @NEW Delete all patterns and clear marker. [/NA[ME]=] @OPE[N] Opens (or merges) marker file. /FI[LE]=[/ME[RGE]] @SAV[E] Saves results in marker file. [/FI[LE]=] File-name is selected or generated [/LO[G]={NO | YES}] Use Log-file @DES[IGN] Open DSN-file. /FI[LE]= [/SE[AM]={C[UT] | S[EW] | B[OTH]}] [/OR[DER]=] Mark Manual304 [/MA[TERIAL]=] [/SI[ZE]= [/QU[ANTITY]=] @IMP[ORT] Import one file. /FI[LE]= /FO[RMAT]=DXF, AAMA, IGES, CADL(CadKey), DFT(cncKad), GERB(Gerber Cutter), HPGL [/UN[IT]=] CM, MM, ME[TER], IN[CH], FE[ET], YA[RD] [/CL[EAR]={NO | YES}] Clears marker before import. [/SI[ZES]={NO | YES}] âUse Sizesâ (as button in Import dialog) [/DS[N]={NO | YES}] Saves Design file [/GB[UF]=] Sets buffer size [/GD[IR]=] 1(None), 2(PI), 4(PI/2), 0(All enable) [/GM[IR]=] 0, 1(Allow) [/QU[ANTITY]=] [/MA[TERIAL]=] @EXP[ORT] Export. /FI[LE]= Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 305 /FO[RMAT]= DXF, AAMA, CADL, IGES [/X[SC]=] [/Y[SC]=] /NS[PLINE]={NO | YES}}]Using splines and polylines [/SP[ST]=] Step for spline line export (only if /NS=YES) [/NA[RC]={NO | YES}] Using arcs [/ARCN[UM]=] Max no.of lines for arc (only if /NARC=YES) [/ARCB[ULGE]=] Bulge for arc lines (only if /NARC=YES) @PLO[TTER] Plotting to file. /FI[LE]= /FO[RMAT]=DMPL, CYBCUT(Cybrid Cutter/Plotter), CYB(Cybrid Plotter), IOLS, HPGL, HP2(HPGL/2), HPTEC(HPGL PlotTec), HPGEN(HPGL Generic),WILD(Wild Cutter/Plotter), WLDPL(Wild Plotter),APGL(Gerber Plotter), MICRO(MicroJet Plotter),GERB(Gerber Cutter), CEDGE(Cutting Edge), EAST(Eastman Cutter) [/X[SC]=] [/Y[SC]=] [/SC[ALE]=] SPG(single page), MPG(multi page), FSC(fixed scale) [/PGX=] [/PGY=] Mark Manual306 [/SP[ST]=] Step for spline line plotting [/ARCB[ULGE]=] Bulge for arc lines [/NOTE=] Title for draft [/FONT[FILE]=] [/F[ONT]SIZE=] [/BIF={YES | NO}] Using built-in font for plotter [/PEN[NUM]=] No.of pens (colors) [/[MIN]LINE=] [/GAP=] [/OUTM[AN]={YES | NO}] Using Output Manager [/COP[IES]=] No.of copies for Output Manager [/ALS[TART]={YES | NO}] Alert on Start in Output Manager [/ALE[ND]={YES | NO}] Alert on End in Output Manager [/RME[ND]={YES | NO}] Remove file on End in Output Manager [/ONEP[AGE]={YES | NO}] Plot all draft on one page only [/CEN0={YES | NO}] Is (0, 0) of Plotter in center of Page [/MAN[FF]={YES | NO}] Using manual Page Advance [/OVER[LAP]={YES | NO}] Using continues / overlapping pages Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 307 [/BORD[ER]={YES | NO}] Plot Border of Marker [/[AUTO]MOT[ION]={YES | NO}] Prepare Moving Optimization @MAR[KER] Set marker size parameters. [/LE[NGTH]=] Marker dimensions [/HE[IGHT]=] [/XO=] Margins [/XE=] [/YO=] [/YE=] [/PL[Y]=] Plies [/MA[TERIAL]=] Material [/FV={NO | YES}] Marker full view mode @CLE[AR] Clear marker. @GLO[BAL] Set global pieces parameters. [/TO[OL]=] [/HT[OOL]=] [/IT[OOL]=] [/NT[YPE]= T, V, I, L, U, P Mark Manual308 [/NM[ODE]= D[RAW], C[UT], P[UNCH] [/PM[ODE]= D[RAW], C[UT], DR[ILL], ADR[ILL] [/SI[DE]= L[EFT], R[IGHT], B[OTH], LB, RB Below is the same to @IMPORT command. [/GB[UF]=] [/GD[IR]=] [/GM[IR]=] [/QU[ANTITY]=] [/MA[TERIAL]=] @NES[T] AutoNesting (works as Continue command). /AL[GORITHM]= QUI[CK], QUA[LITY], TEX[TILE], NES[TER], COM[PACTION] [/TI[ME]=] Time (minutes) for textile and nester algorithms The batch file extension is *.BTF. Listed below are some example batches files. @UNIT /CM @NEW @IMPORT /FO=IGES /FILE=p1001.igs @SAVE /FILE=p13001.dsp Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 309 @NEW @SET /KEY=Bulge /VAL=0.045 @IMPORT /FO=IGES /FILE=p153029.igs @SAVE /FILE=p153029.dsp @NEW @IMPORT /FO=IGES /FILE=p143027.igs @SAVE /FILE=p143027.dsp @! The batch file shown above first defines the units of measure as centimeters, imports the IGES file p13001.igs and saves it as P13001.dsp. Next IGES file p153029.igs is imported with a bulge tolerance of .045 and saved as p153029.dsp. Last IGES file p143027.igs is imported and saved as p143027.dsp. @UNIT /IN @NEW @MARKER /LENGTH=450 /HEIGHT=54 /PLY=3 @DESIGN /FILE=C:\TEXWRK\EXAMPLES\STRIPES.DSN /SEAM=CUT /MATERIAL=STRIPES /SIZE=S /QUANTITY=4 /SIZE=M /QUANTITY=2 /SIZE=L /QUANTITY=1 /SIZE=XL /QUANTITY=1 /SIZE=XXL /QUANTITY=2 @SAVE /FILE=C:\TEXWRK\EXAMPLES\TESTBAT.DSP Mark Manual310 @NEST @SAVE /FILE=C:\TEXWRK\EXAMPLES\TESTBAT.DSP @! The batch file shown above first defines the units of measure as inches, creates a new marker with a maximum length of 450 inches, a width of 54 inches, and 3 plies. The design file stripes is opened with cut lines and material group stripes is defined. 4 small sizes, 2 size mediums, 1 size large, 1 size extra large, and 2 size extra, extra large are requested. The newly requested marker is saved as testbat.dsp. The new marker is then auto nested and saved. @NEW @OPEN /FILE=C:\TEXWRK\EXAMPLES\SPANT.DSP @CLEAR @NEST @SAVE /FILE=C:\TEXWRK\EXAMPLES\SPANT.DSP @! The batch file shown above first starts a new job, then opens an existing marker named SPANT.DSP. The pieces are cleared from the existing marker and auto nesting begins. Once auto nesting is compile, the marker is saved as SPANT.DSP Stop Batch To stop the Start Batch procedure, select Stop Batch from the Nesting Menu. The Batch process is halted. Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 311 Continue Batch Select the Continue Batch command to resume the batch procedure after selecting Stop Batch. Batch Messages The Batch message file includes all remarks and errors that appear while activating the Batch option. It will allow the user to follow Syntax errors while running the batch file. AutoNest Queue The AutoNest Queue command prepares a queue of Marker files, which can be left to nest overnight. A list of marker (DSP) files is created in a table and to define Marker width, Maker Length, Time to Run. It is also possible to select the method of nesting from Quick, Standard, or Nest++. To select files to the nest queue: ⢠Click on the first file field and a little arrow appears. ⢠Click on the arrow to browse you drive to select the desire file. Mark Manual312 ⢠You can select more then one file using the shift or the Ctrl key. ⢠Click OK and the files will be added to the queue . !!!! Tip: To give all the files the same max. time point the mouse pointer to the desired maximum time in one of the files and click on the right button. Chose "equal all" and all the max. time will be equal in all files. Queue Menu Save and Open Queue Files The queue can be saved to disk as "autoNest queue file" (. nst) Open the saved file from this menu. Run Select this command in order to start nesting the files in the queue. Clear This command clear the selected files from the queue list. Chapter 9: Nesting Menu 313 Stop This command stop the nesting process. Export to Excel The result can be exported to excel and help you to investigate, print and mail the nest result. Import to Excel Queue can be imported from excel file. It bring you the option to crate a queue on excel sheet or receive nest queue by e-mail and loaded it to the Optimark. Close Will close the multi nest dialog box Mark Manual314 Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 315 Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation This chapter will guide how to install and configure a width range of plotters and cutters types that supported by OptiTex. Installing Algotex Plotters with SGS Software Installing the Algotex Software ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter cable to the parallel port (LPT2) on the computer. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. ⢠Create a directory called C:\TEXOPLOT\DATA ⢠Copy all the files on the Algotex diskette into the C:\TEXOPLOT directory. The Algotex diskette contains the following files: AUTO_DOT.EXE AUTO_DOT.CNF AUTO_DOT.HLP AUTO_DOT.TXT RASTEX.EXE TEXOPLOT.ICO README.DOC README.TXT ⢠Copy the ALGOTEXP.CFG file into the C:\TEXOPLOT directory. Mark Manual316 ! Note: The ALGOTEXP.CFG file can be found on the diskette attached to the plotter. ⢠Create a directory called C:\OPTITEX\HPGL ⢠Select START, SETTINGS, TASKBAR, START MENU PROGRAMS, ADD. ⢠BROWSE for and OPEN the following file. C:\TEXOPLOT\RASTEX.EXE ⢠Select NEXT. Select the OptiTex Program Group. Type RASTER as the program name and select FINISH. ⢠Select ADD, BROWSE for and OPEN the following file. C:\TEXOPLOT\AUTO_DOT.EXE ⢠Select NEXT. Select the OptiTex Program Group. Type PLOT as the program name and select FINISH. ⢠Select ADVANCED, under Start Menu, select the plus (+) sign to the left of the word âPrograms.â Highlight the OptiTex Program Group. Copy (hold down the shift key and drag) the RASTER program and PLOT program on the right side of the screen to the STARTUP folder on the left side of the screen. You can now CLOSE. ⢠Using a text editor, edit the following file. C:\TEXOPLOT\AUTO_DOT.CNF ⢠Change the Recovery directory to C:\OPTITEX\HPGL and change the Raster Data files directory to C:\TEXOPLOT\DATA Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 317 ⢠Save the changes to the AUTO_DOT.CNF file and return to the WINDOWS desktop. ⢠Restart the computer. Select START, SHUTDOWN, RESTART COMPUTER. Configuring the Alogotex Plotter in SGS software. Once the Algotex software is installed, the SGS software can be configured to work with the plotter. ⢠Start the SGS PDS or MARK program. ⢠From the FILE menu choose PLOTTER SETUP. A Dialog Box is displayed. ⢠Uncheck âUse Output Manager.â ⢠Select OK. ⢠If in working in PDS, display a piece on the screen. If working in MARK, display a marker on the screen. ⢠From the FILE menu select PLOT. Select SETUP from the lower left side of the dialog box. ⢠In the Plot Setting Dialog Box select HPGL as the format. In Plotter Page Size, the X must be _____ and the Y must be the width of the paper (72 inches is the maximum). ⢠Select OK, the Plot Dialog Box is once again displayed. Make sure that the following settings are unchecked while testing: Output Manager, Use, Alert on Start, Remove on End, Alert on End. ⢠Select OK. Mark Manual318 Hewlett Packard 600 or 700 Ink Jet Plotter Connecting the plotter ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer. If your HP Ink Jet only came with a parallel cable, it will be necessary to order an RS232 serial cable from Hewlett Packard or from your plotter distributor. A generic cable will not work. Your plot files will not plot on the HP Ink Jet unless you are using a cable from HP. ! Tip: Serial ports are usually referred to as COM ports and can be identified as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4. ! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on many computers COM ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ (Interrupt Request), and COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices you may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports to avoid an IRQ conflict. For detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows manuals for your system. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 319 Configuring the output manger Using the Outman as output manger: ⢠From the START menu click OUTMAN from OptiTex sub-menu. ! Note: The OutMan will be named Outman-1 (or OutMan-2 if you specified the plotter as pltr2.) ⢠From the OPTIONS menu, choose WORKING UNITS. The working units dialog box will display. ⢠Choose the appropriate setting. ⢠Click OK. ⢠From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. The Communication dialog box will display. Set the following port options: Port - Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected. Baud Rate - 9600 Data Bits - 8 Parity - None Stop Bits - 1 Flow Control - XON/XOFF Protocol - NONE ⢠Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display. ⢠Enter the Width and Length of the paper. ⢠Click OK. Mark Manual320 ! Note: If the exact length of the paper is unknown, estimate. The length of the paper needs to be longer than the plot file that will be plotted. ⢠Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close the Outman. Configuring Qman ⢠Open the QMan by double clicking on the icon in the START menu. Usually located in START>Optitex 8> Output control> Qman ⢠From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS. ⢠Select the appropriate working units. The selection should match the working units that were set in the SGS Plot setup dialog box. OutMan Path Setup ⢠From the FILE menu, choose PLOT SETUP. The OutMan Setup dialog box will display. ⢠The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not: ⢠Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list of available drive/directories on the right. ⢠Click OK. ⢠Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close the Qman. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 321 Using the OCC as output manger ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. ⢠Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line. ⢠Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START menu. ⢠In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP ⢠In the plotters setup box click on ADD. ⢠Select the âmy computerâ option. Click NEXT. ⢠In the âCommunication Settingâ select the following: Port - the port to which the plotter is connected Port - Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected. Baud Rate - 9600 Data Bits - 8 Parity - None Stop Bits - 1 Flow Control - XON/XOFF Protocol - NONE ⢠Click NEXT. Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application. Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH. Mark Manual322 ! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer. ⢠Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation. ⢠Close or minimize the OCC window. Configuring the SGS programs Plotter Setup The Plotter Setup command in SGS Grade, PDS, and Mark is used to select the location of the OutMan.ini file and the plotter to be used. ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working area. ⢠Place a pattern on the working area. ⢠From the FILE menu, choose the PLOT command ⢠Check the Use Output Manager field. ⢠Select the output manger that you using. ⢠For Outman users: Put the correct Outman.ini Path and plotter number in the OUTMAN MANAGER field. Select OK. ⢠Click OK. Plot ⢠From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will display. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 323 ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working area. Use Output Manager - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter. Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are optional. For detailed information on each of these options refer to the Plotting chapter of the userâs manual, or the plotting tutorial. Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale. Options - Set to Plot Continuous. Scale Factor - Set to X=1, Y=1. Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size. ⢠Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size. The Plot Setting dialog box will display. Plot Setting Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The plotter number depends on how many plotters were identified during the SGS software installation process. Format - Plotter Language. Set to HPGL/2. Device Options (0,0) in Page Center and Manual Page Replace â both are disabled (unchecked). Mark Manual324 Pens - Set to 1. Font Options Use Plotterâs Built-in Font - Should be enabled (checked). Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory. If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file. Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the header of the plot. Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots. Minimal Cut/Plot Line - .008 Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. For now set at .008 Plotter Page Size X - The X value is the marker length. It should be set to larger than the length of your longest expected marker. However, this setting may be adjusted for unusually long markers. Y - The Y value should always be set to 35.5 inches (maximum plot width.) Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 325 ! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount of paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 35.5 inches. There is no way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot at all. ⢠Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box. The pieces on the working area will be sent to print on the plotter. Hewlett Packard 750C Ink Jet Plotter Connecting the plotter ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer. If your HP Ink Jet only came with a parallel cable, it will be necessary to order an RS232 serial cable from Hewlett Packard or from your plotter distributor. A generic cable will not work. Your plot files will not plot on the HP Ink Jet unless you are using a cable from Hewlett Packard. ! Tip: Serial ports are usually referred to as COM ports and can be identified as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4. ! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on many computers COM ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ (Interrupt Request), and COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices you may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports to avoid an IRQ conflict. For detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows manuals for your system. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. Mark Manual326 ⢠Be sure that the Page format in the HP750C Menu is set to Inked Area. Please see attached diagram from the HP 750C Quick Reference Guide. Using the Outman as output manger: ⢠From the START menu click on the OUTMAN in the OptiTex 8 folder. ⢠From the OPTIONS menu, choose WORKING UNITS. The working units dialog box will display. ⢠Choose the appropriate setting. ⢠Click OK. ⢠From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. The Communication dialog box will display. Port Options Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected. Baud Rate = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Parity = None Stop Bits = 1 Flow Control = XON/XOFF Protocol = NONE Paper Size ⢠Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display. ⢠Enter the Width and Length of the paper. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 327 ⢠Click OK. ! Note: If the exact length of the paper is unknown, estimate. The length of the paper needs to be longer than the plot file that will be plotted. ⢠Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close the Outman. Configuring Qman ⢠From the START menu click on the QMAN in the OptiTex directory. ⢠From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS. ⢠Select the appropriate working units. The selection should match the working units that were set in the SGS Plot setup dialog box. ⢠From the FILE menu, choose OPTIONS. The OutMan Setup dialog box will display. The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not: ⢠Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list of available drive/directories on the right. ⢠Click OK. ⢠Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close the Qman. Mark Manual328 Using the OCC as output manger ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. ⢠Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line. ⢠Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START menu. ⢠In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP ⢠In the plotters setup box click on ADD. ⢠Select the âmy computerâ option. Click NEXT. ⢠In the âCommunication Settingâ select the following: Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected. Baud Rate = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Parity = None Stop Bits = 1 Flow Control = XON/XOFF Protocol = NONE ⢠Click NEXT. ⢠Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application. Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 329 ! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer. ⢠Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation. ⢠Close or minimize the OCC window. Configuring the SGS programs Configuring the plotter through the SGS programs involves selecting a plotter, configuring the plotter, and configuring the OutMan and the QMan. This document gives basic settings and configuration instructions used for HP 750 plotters. For a detailed description of the plotting options, refer to the Plotting section of the SGS Grade, Mark, or PDS manual. Also, refer to the plotting tutorial located at the front of each manual. Plotter Setup The Plotter Setup command in SGS Grade, PDS, and Mark is used to select the location of the OutMan.ini file and the plotter to be used. ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working area. ⢠From the FILE menu, choose PLOT command. ⢠Check the âUSE OUTPUT MANGERâ options. ⢠Select the Output manger to use. ⢠For OutMan users: browse to locate the outman.ini file. And enter the plotter number. Mark Manual330 Plot ⢠From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will display. ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working area. Output Manager Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter. Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are optional. For detailed information on each of these options refer to the Plotting chapter of the userâs manual, or the plotting tutorial. Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale. Options - Set to Plot Continuous. Scale Factor - Set to X=1, Y=1. Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size. ⢠Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size. The Plot Setting dialog box will display. Plot Setting Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The plotter number depends on how many plotters were identified during the SGS software installation process. Format - Plotter Language. Set to HPGL/2. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 331 Device Options (0,0) in Page Center and Manual Page Replace â both are disabled (unchecked). Pens - Set to 1. Font Options Use Plotterâs Built-in Font - Should be disabled (unchecked). Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory. If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file. Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the header of the plot. Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots. Minimal Cut/Plot Line - .008 Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. For now set at .008 Plotter Page Size X - The X value is the marker length. It should be set to larger than the length of your longest expected marker. However, this setting may be adjusted for unusually long markers. Y - The Y value should always be set to 35.5 inches (maximum plot width.) Mark Manual332 ! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount of paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 35.5 inches. There is no way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot at all. ⢠Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box. ⢠Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but the plot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not been setup. Troubleshooting for the HP Ink Jet 750C Make sure the I/O settings on the plotter have been setup. For instructions, refer to the HP user manual. Settings should correspond with the port options used in SGS software when configuring the OutMan. (See section, âConfiguring Outmanâ under âCommunication.â) Be sure that the Page format in the HP750C Menu is set to Inked Area. Please see attached diagram from the HP 750C Quick Reference Guide. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 333 From the HP750C Quick Reference Guide Front-Panel Menu (On Plotter) Structure Page Format -> Size -> Oversize -> Inked Area Mark Manual334 Configuring the Hewlett Packard Draftmaster II Plotter The HP Draftmaster II (model #7596A) plotter will not plot more than one frame. A frame is 46 inches long. Connecting the plotter ⢠Turn your computer off. ⢠Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer. ! Tip: Serial ports are usually referred to as COM ports and can be identified as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4. ! Note: Any serial port can be used however, keep in mind that on many computers COM ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ (Interrupt Request), and COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices you may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports to avoid an IRQ conflict. For detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows manuals for your system. ⢠Turn the computer on. ⢠Turn the plotter on. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 335 Configuring SGS Programs Plotter Setup ! Note: To access the Plot command you must have a piece in the working area. ⢠From the FILE menu choose PLOT command. The plot dialog box will be displayed. ⢠Enable the USE OUTPUT MANGER by clicking the box next to the Use Output Manager option. A small âxâ should appear in the box. ⢠For OUTMAN users: locate the outman.ini file by selecting the Browse button. Select the directory that contains the OutMan.ini file. ⢠Select the Plotter number you want to assign to the HP plotter (i.e. Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.) ⢠Click OK. Plot ⢠From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will be displayed. ! Note: To access the Plot command you must have a piece in the working area. Output Manager Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter. Mark Manual336 Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are optional. For detailed information on each of these options refer to the Plotting chapter of the userâs manual, or the plotting tutorial. Page Format - Page format should be set to Fixed Scale. Options - Plot Continuous - enabled Scale Factor - Should be set to X=1, Y=1. Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size. ⢠Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size. The Plot Setting dialog box will be displayed. Plot Setting Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of Pltr listing depends on how many plotters you specified during your OptiTex software installation. Format - Plotter Language. Should be set to HPGL Device Options (0,0) in Page Center - enabled Manual Page Replace - disabled. Number of Pens - set to 1. Font Options Use Plotterâs Built-in Font - disabled. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 337 Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory. If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file. Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the plot. ! Note: This setting overrides the plot font settings specified elsewhere in the program. Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots to enable cutting between the plots. (Commonly set to 4â) Minimal Cut/Plot Line - .008 Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. For now set at .008 Plotter Page Size X - The X value should always be set to 46 inches. (Max frame size) Y - The Y value should always be set to 34.5 inches. (Maximum plot width) ! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter meaning this is the amount of paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time. There is no way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this setting is set to anything else, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot at all. ⢠Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box. ⢠Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but the plot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not been setup. Mark Manual338 Configuring the output manger Using the Outman as output manger ⢠Open the OutMan from the START menu/OptiTex/output control. ⢠Working Units - From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The working units dialog box will be displayed. ⢠Choose the setting you wish to use. ⢠Click OK. ⢠From the OPTIONS menu choose COMMUNICATION. The Communication dialog box will be displayed. Communication Port Options Port = Select the COM port you have the plotter connected to. Baud Rate = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Parity = None Stop Bits = 1 Flow Control = XON/XOFF Protocol = NONE Paper Size ⢠Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will be displayed. ⢠Enter the Width and Length of the paper you are using. ⢠Click OK. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 339 ! Note: If you are using a roll of paper and donât know the exact length, estimate. The length of the paper needs to be longer than the plot you wish to send. ⢠Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Configuring Qman ⢠Open the QMan by double clicking on the icon at START manu/ OptiTex 8 / output manger. Working Units ⢠From the FILE menu choose WORKING UNITS. ⢠Select the same setting you selected in the OptiTex plot setup. OutMan Path Setup ⢠From the OPTIONS menu choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan Setup dialog box will be displayed. ⢠The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not: ⢠Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list of available drive/directories on the right. ⢠Click OK. ⢠Minimize the QMan, keeping it running. Using the OCC as output manger ⢠Turn off the computer. Mark Manual340 ⢠Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably COM1 or COM2. ! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4 or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and modem. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. ⢠Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line. ⢠Open the OCC program from START menu, OptiTex folder. ⢠In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP ⢠In the plotters setup box click on ADD. ⢠Select the âmy computerâ option. Click NEXT. ⢠In the âCommunication Settingâ select the following: Port = Select the COM port you have the plotter connected to. Baud Rate = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Parity = None Stop Bits = 1 Flow Control = XON/XOFF Protocol = NONE ⢠Click NEXT. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 341 ⢠Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application. Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH. ! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer. ⢠Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation. ⢠Close or minimize the OCC window. Mark Manual342 Ioline 28 Plotter Connecting the plotter ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer. ! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identified as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4. ! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on many computers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ, and COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices you may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. For detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows manuals for your system. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. Install the Ioline software ⢠Put the Ioline diskette into the floppy drive. ⢠From the START menu, select RUN. ⢠Type SETUP: A. ⢠Select OK or press Enter on the keyboard. ⢠Follow the on-screen instructions for installation and setup. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 343 ! Note: For detailed instructions on installing the Ioline software, refer to the Installation chapter of the Ioline userâs manual. Test Plot Once the Plotter and software have been installed and configured, send a test plot to the plotter. The Ioline Control Center software includes a couple test plot files. The âSend Plot Fileâ command is located in the FILE menu. For instructions on sending a test file to the Ioline 28, refer to the Ioline userâs manual. Calibration Plot Once a test plot has been successfully plotted indicating that the plotter has been configured properly in the Ioline software, the plot may be calibrated. Calibrating the plot involves plotting a pre-determined size square, measuring the actual plot and entering the values into the Ioline Calibration program. The Ioline software makes the necessary corrections and sends the settings to the plotter. The CALIBRATE PLOTTER command is located in the CALIBRATE menu. For detailed instructions on running the calibration program, refer to the Ioline userâs manual. Configuring SGS Programs for the Ioline Plot Setup ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area. ⢠From the FILE menu choose PLOT command. The plot dialog box will be displayed. ⢠Enable the USE OUTPUT MANGER by clicking the box next to the Use Output Manager option. A small âxâ should appear in the box. Mark Manual344 ⢠For OUTMAN users: locate the outman.ini file by selecting the Browse button. Select the directory that contains the OutMan.ini file. ⢠Select the Plotter number you want to assign to the HP plotter (i.e. Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.) ⢠Click OK. Plot ⢠From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The âPlotâ dialog box will display. ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working area. Output Manager Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter. Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are optional. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to the Plotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial. Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale. Options - Set to Plot Continuous. Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1. Frame Advance After Last Frame â Checked. Bulge Corde Error â controls curved lines. The closer the setting to 0, the truer the curve. However, as this setting gets closer to 0, the pen also moves Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 345 slower. A larger number creates a faster, less accurate curve. Use .008 inches as a starting point and adjust this setting as necessary. Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size. ⢠Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size. The Plot Setting dialog box will display. Plot Setting Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of the plotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS software installation. Format - Plotter Language. Set to either HPGL or DMPL. Device Options (0,0) in Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked). Manual Page Replace - Should be disabled (unchecked). Number of Pens - Set to 1. Font Options Use Plotterâs Built-in Font - Should be disabled (unchecked). Plotter Font File â The Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory should be displayed. If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file (usually located in C:\OptiTex). Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the header of the marker. Mark Manual346 Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots. Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Ioline plotters. Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. The default is 0. Plotter Page Size Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factory setting is 72 inches. Adjust this setting according to the paper size you are using. X- The X value should always be set to 46 inches or 118 cm. ! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount of paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 46 inches. There is no way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot at all. ⢠Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box. ⢠Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but the plot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not been setup. The SGS software has been configured. The next step is to configure the OutMan and the Qman. The OutMan and QMan start automatically when a plot file is sent to the plotter. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 347 Configuring the output manger Use the Outman as output manger. ⢠Open the OutMan from the START menu/OptiTex/output control. Working Units From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The working units dialog box will display. ⢠Choose the appropriate setting. ⢠Click OK. Communication ⢠From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. The Communication dialog box will display. Port Options Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected. Baud Rate = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Parity = None Stop Bits = 1 Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL. HPGL DTR/DSR = Enabled (checked) RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked) Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked) DMPL (recommended) Mark Manual348 DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked) RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked) Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked) Protocol = NONE. Paper Size ⢠Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display. ⢠Enter the Width and Length of the paper. ⢠Click OK. ! Note: If the exact paper length is unknown, estimate. The length of the paper needs to be longer than the file that will be plotted. ⢠Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close OutMan Configuring Qman ⢠Open the QMan by clicking on the icon from the output utility sub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder. Working Units ⢠From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS. ⢠Select the appropriate units. The selection should match the working units set in the SGS plot dialog box. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 349 OutMan Path Setup ⢠From the OPTION menu, choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan Setup dialog box will display. The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not: Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list of available drive/directories on the right. ⢠Click OK. ⢠Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close Qman. Hints If the plotter does not plot, check the file name length. It should be limited to 8 alphanumeric characters. Using the OCC as output manger ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably COM1 or COM2. ! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4 or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and modem. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. Mark Manual350 ⢠Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line. ⢠Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START menu. ⢠In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP ⢠In the plotters setup box click on ADD. ⢠Select the âmy computerâ option. Click NEXT. ⢠In the âCommunication Settingâ select the following: Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected. Baud Rate = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Parity = None Stop Bits = 1 Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL. HPGL DTR/DSR = Enabled (checked) RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked) Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked) DMPL (recommended) DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked) RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked) Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked) Protocol = NONE. ⢠Click NEXT. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 351 ⢠Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application. Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH. ! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer. ⢠Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation. ⢠Close or minimize the OCC window. Mark Manual352 Ioline 600 Plotter Connecting the plotter ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer. ! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identified as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4. ! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on many computers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ and COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices you may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. For detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows manuals for your system. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. Install the Ioline software ⢠Put the Ioline diskette into the floppy drive. ⢠From the START menu, select RUN. ⢠Type SETUP: A. ⢠Select OK or press Enter on the keyboard. ⢠Follow the on-screen instructions for installation and setup. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 353 ! Note: For detailed instructions on installing the Ioline software, refer to the Installation chapter of the Ioline userâs manual. Test Plot Once the Plotter and software have been installed and configured, send a test plot to the plotter. The Ioline Control Center software includes a couple test plot files. The âSend Plot Fileâ command is located in the FILE menu. For instructions on sending a test file to the Ioline 600, refer to the Ioline userâs manual. Calibration Plot Once a test plot has been successfully plotted indicating that the plotter has been configured properly in the Ioline software, the plot may be calibrated. Calibrating the plot involves plotting a pre-determined size square, measuring the actual plot and entering the values into the Ioline Calibration program. The Ioline software makes the necessary corrections and sends the settings to the plotter. The CALIBRATE PLOTTER command is located in the CALIBRATE menu. For detailed instructions on running the calibration program, refer to the Ioline userâs manual. Configuring SGS Programs for the Ioline Plot Setup ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area. ⢠From the FILE menu choose PLOT command. The plot dialog box will be displayed. ⢠Enable the USE OUTPUT MANGER by clicking the box next to the Use Output Manager option. A small âxâ should appear in the box. Mark Manual354 ⢠For OutMan users: locate the outman.ini file by selecting the Browse button. Select the directory that contains the OutMan.ini file. ⢠Select the Plotter number you want to assign to the HP plotter (i.e. Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.) ⢠Click OK. Plot ⢠From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The âPlotâ dialog box will display. ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working area. Output Manager Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter. Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are optional. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to the Plotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial. Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale. Options - Set to Plot Continuous. Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1. Frame Advance After Last Frame â Checked. Bulge Cord Error â controls curved lines. The closer the setting to 0, the truer the curve. However, as this setting gets closer to 0, the pen also moves Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 355 slower. A larger number creates a faster, less accurate curve. Use .008 inches as a starting point and adjust this setting as necessary. Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size. ⢠Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size. The Plot Setting dialog box will display. Plot Setting Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of the plotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS software installation. Format - Plotter Language. Set to either HPGL or DMPL. Device Options (0,0) in Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked). Manual Page Replace - Should be disabled (unchecked). Number of Pens - Set to 1. Font Options Use Plotterâs Built-in Font - Should be disabled (unchecked). Plotter Font File â The Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory should be displayed. If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file (usually located in C:\OptiTex). Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the header of the marker. Mark Manual356 Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots. Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Ioline plotters. Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. The default is 0. Plotter Page Size Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factory setting is 72 inches. Adjust this setting according to the paper size you are using. X- The X value should always be set to 46 inches or 118 cm. ! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount of paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 46 inches. There is no way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot at all. ⢠Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box. ⢠Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but the plot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not been setup. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 357 Configuring the output manger Using the Outman as output manger. ⢠Open the OutMan from the START menu/OptiTex/output control. Working Units From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The working units dialog box will display. ⢠Choose the appropriate setting. ⢠Click OK. Communication ⢠From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. The Communication dialog box will display. Port Options Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected. Baud Rate = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Parity = None Stop Bits = 1 Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL. HPGL DTR/DSR = Enabled (checked) RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked) Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked) DMPL (recommended) DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked) Mark Manual358 RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked) Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked) Protocol = NONE. Paper Size ⢠Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display. ⢠Enter the Width and Length of the paper. ⢠Click OK. ! Note: If the exact paper length is unknown, estimate. The length of the paper needs to be longer than the file that will be plotted. ⢠Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close OutMan Configuring Qman ⢠Open the QMan by clicking on the icon from the output utility sub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder/ Output Control Working Units ⢠From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS. ⢠Select the appropriate units. The selection should match the working units set in the SGS plot dialog box. OutMan Path Setup ⢠From the OPTION menu, choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan Setup dialog box will display. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 359 ⢠The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not: Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list of available drive/directories on the right. ⢠Click OK. ⢠Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close Qman. Hints If the plotter does not plot, check the file name length. It should be limited to 8 alphanumeric characters. Using the OCC as output manger ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably COM1 or COM2. ! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4 or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and modem. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. ⢠Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line. ⢠Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START menu. ⢠In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP Mark Manual360 ⢠In the plotters setup box click on ADD. ⢠Select the âmy computerâ option. Click NEXT. ⢠In the âCommunication Settingâ select the following: Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected. Baud Rate = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Parity = None Stop Bits = 1 Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL. HPGL DTR/DSR = Enabled (checked) RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked) Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked) DMPL (recommended) DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked) RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked) Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked) Protocol = NONE. ⢠Click NEXT. ⢠Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application. Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 361 ! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer. ⢠Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation. ⢠Close or minimize the OCC window. Mark Manual362 Ioline Studio Plotter Connecting the plotter ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer. ! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identified as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4. ! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on many computers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ, and COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices you may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. For detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows manuals for your system. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. Install the Ioline software ⢠Put the Ioline diskette into the floppy drive. ⢠From the START menu, select RUN. ⢠Type SETUP: A. ⢠Select OK or press Enter on the keyboard. ⢠Follow the on-screen instructions for installation and setup. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 363 ! Note: For detailed instructions on installing the Ioline software, refer to the Installation chapter of the Ioline userâs manual. Test Plot Once the Plotter and software have been installed and configured, send a test plot to the plotter. The Ioline Control Center software includes a couple test plot files. The âSend Plot Fileâ command is located in the FILE menu. For instructions on sending a test file to the Ioline 600, refer to the Ioline userâs manual. Calibration Plot Once a test plot has been successfully plotted indicating that the plotter has been configured properly in the Ioline software, the plot may be calibrated. Calibrating the plot involves plotting a pre-determined size square, measuring the actual plot and entering the values into the Ioline Calibration program. The Ioline software makes the necessary corrections and sends the settings to the plotter. The CALIBRATE PLOTTER command is located in the CALIBRATE menu. For detailed instructions on running the calibration program, refer to the Ioline userâs manual. Configuring SGS Programs for the Ioline Plot Setup ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area. ⢠From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will display. ⢠Enable the âUse Output Managerâ. A small âxâ should appear in the box. Mark Manual364 ⢠For OutMan users: Select the directory that contains the OutMan.ini (usually C:\Optitex) by clicking the Browse. Select the Plotter number to be assigned to the Ioline. ⢠Click OK. Plot ⢠From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The âPlotâ dialog box will display. ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working area. Output Manager Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter. Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are optional. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to the Plotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial. Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale. Options - Set to Plot Continuous. Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1. Frame Advance After Last Frame â Checked. Bulge Cord Error â controls curved lines. The closer the setting to 0, the truer the curve. However, as this setting gets closer to 0, the pen also moves slower. A larger number creates a faster, less accurate curve. Use .008 inches as a starting point and adjust this setting as necessary. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 365 Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size. ⢠Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size. The Plot Setting dialog box will display. Plot Setting Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of the plotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS software installation. Format - Plotter Language. Set to either HPGL or DMPL. Device Options (0,0) In Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked). Manual Page Replace - Should be disabled (unchecked). Number of Pens - Set to 1. Font Options Use Plotterâs Built-in Font - Should be disabled (unchecked). Plotter Font File â The Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory should be displayed. If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file (usually located in C:\OptiTex). Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the header of the marker. Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots. Mark Manual366 Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Ioline plotters. Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. The default is 0. Plotter Page Size Y â The Y value should be 39.5 inches (the maximum plotting & cutting width). X â The X value should be 46 inches (the plotter frame size). ! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount of paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 46 inches. There is no way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot at all. ⢠Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box. ⢠4. Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but the plot will not be sent because the OutMan and Qman were not set. Configuring the output manger Using the OutMan as output manger ⢠In the START menu, click on the OutMan icon at the OptiTex \ OUTPUT CONTROL folder. ⢠From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The working units dialog box will display. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 367 ⢠Choose the appropriate setting. ⢠Click OK. Communication ⢠From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. The Communication dialog box will display. Port Options Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected. Baud Rate = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Parity = None Stop Bits = 1 Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL. HPGL DTR/DSR = Enabled (checked) RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked) Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked) DMPL (recommended) DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked) RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked) Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked) Protocol = NONE. Paper Size ⢠Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display. ⢠Enter the Width and Length of the paper. Mark Manual368 ⢠Click OK. ! Note: If the exact paper length is unknown, estimate. The length of the paper needs to be longer than the file that will be plotted. ⢠Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close OutMan Configuring Qman ⢠Open the QMan by clicking on the icon from the Output Control sub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder. Working Units ⢠From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS. ⢠Select the appropriate units. The selection should match the working units set in the SGS plot dialog box. OutMan Path Setup ⢠From the OPTION menu, choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan Setup dialog box will display. ⢠The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not: ⢠Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list of available drive/directories on the right. ⢠Click OK. ⢠Minimize the Qman keeping it running. Do not close Qman. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 369 Using the OCC as output manger ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably COM1 or COM2. ! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4 or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and modem. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. ⢠Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line. ⢠Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START menu. ⢠In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP ⢠In the plotters setup box click on ADD. ⢠Select the âmy computerâ option. Click NEXT. ⢠In the âCommunication Settingâ select the following: Port Options Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected. Baud Rate = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Parity = None Stop Bits = 1 Mark Manual370 Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL. HPGL DTR/DSR = Enabled (checked) RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked) Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked) DMPL (recommended) DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked) RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked) Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked) Protocol = NONE. ⢠Click NEXT. ⢠Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application. Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH. ! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer. ⢠Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation. Close or minimize the OCC window Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 371 Ioline Stylist Plotter Connecting the plotter ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer. ! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identified as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4. ! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on many computers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ, and COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices you may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. For detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows manuals for your system. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. Configuring SGS Programs for the Ioline Plot Setup The Plotter Setup command is used to select the location of the OutMan.ini and the plotter. ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area. ⢠From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will display. ⢠Enable the Use Output Manager. A small âxâ should appear in the box. Mark Manual372 ⢠Select the output manger that you using ⢠For OutMan users: locate the outman.ini file by clicking on the browse button and select the Plotter number to be assigned to the Ioline. ⢠Click OK. Plot ⢠From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will display. ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working area. Output Manager Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter. Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are optional. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to the Plotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial. Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale. Options - Set to Plot Continuous. Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1. Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size. ⢠Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size. The Plot Setting dialog box will display. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 373 Plot Setting Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of the plotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS software installation. Format - Plotter Language. Set to DMPL. Device Options (0,0) in Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked). Manual Page Replace - Should be disabled (unchecked). Number of Pens - Set to 1. Font Options Use Plotterâs Built-in Font - Should be disabled (unchecked). Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory. If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file. Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the plot. ! Note: This setting overrides the plot font settings specified elsewhere in the program. Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots. Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Ioline plotters. Mark Manual374 Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. Plotter Page Size Y - The Y value is the width of the paper. The factory setting is 72 inches. Adjust this setting according to the paper size you are using. X- The X value should always be set to 36 inches. ! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount of paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 36 inches. There is no way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot at all. ⢠Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box. ⢠Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but the plot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not been setup. Configuring the output manger Using the Outman as output manger ⢠Open the OutMan by clicking on the icon from the Output Control sub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder. Working Units ⢠From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The working units dialog box will display. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 375 ⢠Choose the appropriate setting. ⢠Click OK. Communication ⢠From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. The Communication dialog box will display. Port Options Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected. Baud Rate = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Parity = None Stop Bits = 1 Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL. DMPL DTR/DSR = disabled (unchecked) RTS/CTS = disabled (unchecked) Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked) Protocol = NONE. Paper Size ⢠Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display. ⢠Enter the Width and Length of the paper. Mark Manual376 Click OK. ! Note: If the exact paper length is unknown, estimate. The length of the paper needs to be longer than the file that will be plotted. ⢠Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close OutMan Configuring Qman ⢠Open the QMan by clicking on the icon from the Output Control sub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder Working Units ⢠From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS. ⢠Select the appropriate units. The selection should match the working units set in the SGS plot dialog box. Path Setup The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not: ⢠Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list of available drive/directories on the right. ⢠Click OK. ⢠Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close Qman. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 377 Using the OCC as output manger ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably COM1 or COM2. ! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4 or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and modem. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. ⢠Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line. ⢠Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START menu. ⢠In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP ⢠In the plotters setup box click on ADD. ⢠Select the âmy computerâ option. Click NEXT. ⢠In the âCommunication Settingâ select the following: Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected. Baud Rate = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Parity = None Stop Bits = 1 Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL. Mark Manual378 DMPL DTR/DSR = disabled (unchecked) RTS/CTS = disabled (unchecked) Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked) Protocol = NONE. ⢠Click NEXT. ⢠Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application. Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH. ! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer. ⢠Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 379 Configuring the Ioline Summit Plotter For Use With SGS Software Connecting the plotter ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer. ! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identified as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4. ! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on many computers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ and COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices you may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. For detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows manuals for your system. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. Install the Ioline software ⢠Put the Ioline diskette into the floppy drive. ⢠From the START menu, select RUN. ⢠Type SETUP: A. ⢠Select OK or press Enter on the keyboard. ⢠Follow the on-screen instructions for installation and setup. Mark Manual380 ! Note: For detailed instructions on installing the Ioline software, refer to the Installation chapter of the Ioline userâs manual. Test Plot Once the Plotter and software have been installed and configured, send a test plot to the plotter. The Ioline Control Center software includes a couple test plot files. The âSend Plot Fileâ command is located in the FILE menu. For instructions on sending a test file to the Summit, refer to the Ioline userâs manual. Calibration Plot Once a test plot has been successfully plotted indicating that the plotter has been configured properly in the Ioline software, the plot may be calibrated. Calibrating the plot involves plotting a pre-determined size square, measuring the actual plot and entering the values into the Ioline Calibration program. The Ioline software makes the necessary corrections and sends the settings to the plotter. The CALIBRATE PLOTTER command is located in the CALIBRATE menu. For detailed instructions on running the calibration program, refer to the Ioline userâs manual. Configuring SGS Programs for the Ioline Plot Setup ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area. ⢠From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. The âPlotâ dialog box will display. ⢠Select the Output manger to use. ⢠Enable the Use Output Manager. A small âxâ should appear in the box. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 381 ⢠For OutMan users: If an OutMan.ini location does not appear in the box, select Browse to locate the outman.ini file. Select the Plotter number to be assigned to the Ioline. ⢠Click OK. Plot ⢠From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The âPlotâ dialog box will display. ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working area. Output Manager Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter. Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are optional. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to the Plotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial. Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale. Options - Set to Plot Continuous. Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1. Frame Advance After Last Frame â Checked. Bulge Corde Error â controls curved lines. The closer the setting to 0, the truer the curve. However, as this setting gets closer to 0, the pen also moves slower. A larger number creates a faster, less accurate curve. Use .008 inches as a starting point and adjust this setting as necessary. Mark Manual382 Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size. ⢠Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size. The Plot Setting dialog box will display. Plot Setting Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of the plotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS software installation. Format - Plotter Language. Set to either HPGL or DMPL. Device Options (0,0) In Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked). Manual Page Replace - Should be disabled (unchecked). Number of Pens - Set to 1. Font Options Use Plotterâs Built-in Font - Should be disabled (unchecked). Plotter Font File â The Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory should be displayed. If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file (usually located in C:\OptiTex). Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the header of the marker. Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 383 Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Ioline plotters. Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. The default is 0. Plotter Page Size Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factory setting is 72 inches. Adjust this setting according to the paper size you are using. X- The X value should always be set to 46 inches or 118 cm. ! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount of paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 46 inches. There is no way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot at all. ⢠Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box. ⢠Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but the plot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not been setup. The SGS software has been configured. The next step is to configure the OutMan and the Qman. The OutMan and QMan start automatically when a plot file is sent to the plotter. Mark Manual384 Configuring the output manger. Using the OutMan as Output manger ⢠Open the OutMan by clicking on the icon from the Output Control sub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder. Working Units From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The working units dialog box will display. ⢠Choose the appropriate setting. ⢠Click OK. Communication ⢠From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. The Communication dialog box will display. Port Options Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected. Baud Rate = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Parity = None Stop Bits = 1 Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL.HPGL DTR/DSR = Enabled (checked) RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked) Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked) DMPL (recommended) DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked) Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 385 RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked) Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked) Protocol = NONE. Paper Size ⢠Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display. ⢠Enter the Width and Length of the paper. ⢠Click OK. ! Note: If the exact paper length is unknown, estimate. The length of the paper needs to be longer than the file that will be plotted. ⢠Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close OutMan Configure the Qman ⢠Open the QMan by clicking on the icon from the Output Control sub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder. Working Units ⢠From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS. ⢠Select the appropriate units. The selection should match the working units set in the SGS plot dialog box. OutMan Path Setup ⢠From the OPTION menu, choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan Setup dialog box will display. Mark Manual386 ⢠The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not: ⢠Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list of available drive/directories on the right. ⢠Click OK. ⢠Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close Qman. Using the OCC as output manger ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably COM1 or COM2. ! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4 or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and modem. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. ⢠Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line. ⢠Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START menu. ⢠In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP ⢠In the plotters setup box click on ADD. ⢠Select the âmy computerâ option. Click NEXT. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 387 ⢠In the âCommunication Settingâ select the following: Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected. Baud Rate = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Parity = None Stop Bits = 1 Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL. HPGL DTR/DSR = Enabled (checked) RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked) Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked) DMPL (recommended) DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked) RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked) Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked) Protocol = NONE. ⢠Click NEXT. ⢠Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application. Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH. ! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer. ⢠Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation. Close or minimize the OCC window Mark Manual388 Troubleshooting Tips for the Ioline Summit Plotter Ioline software showâs no plotter: Cable - make sure it is securely fastened at both ends. If possible try another cable. Perform the Serial Test: included with the Ioline Control Center software. For instructions on performing this test refer to the Summit Userâs Guide. Blinking red light on plotter after plot has been sent: Communication problems: Check the following: Cable - make sure it is securely fastened at both ends. If possible try another cable. Port Configuration - Make sure the port is configured correctly: Baud rate =9600 Parity =none Data bits =8 Stop bits =1 Flow control HPGL = DTR/DSR-enabled RTS/CTS-enabled Xon/Xoff- disabled DMPL = DTR/DSR-disabled Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 389 RTS/CTS-disabled Xon/Xoff- enabled Port - Have port checked. Plotter - Run Plotter Port Test, which requires a diagnostic module available from Ioline. The Ioline plotter wonât plot: Cable - make sure it is securely fastened at both ends. If possible try another cable. OutMan - Make sure it is running, the communication and handshake settings are correct and the protocol is set to none. QMan - Make sure it is running. Make sure the OutMan path is specified correctly. Ioline is in Stop Mode - Press the Start/Stop key to put the plotter in start mode (green light). Test plot - Send a test plot from DOS or Ioline Control Panel software. If the plotter doesnât plot from Ioline software, refer to the troubleshooting guide in the Ioline userâs manual. The Ioline Plotter Plots Incorrectly, Doesnât finish the plot, skips parts of the plot or leaves large gaps between frames: Frame Size - Frame size is set incorrectly. Frame size should be X = 46, Y = width of paper, typically 72â. Plots âgarbageâ: Mark Manual390 Language - Make sure the correct language is being sent. Language for this plotter is set to either DMPL or HPGL. Plots too large/small: Scale Factor - Make sure the Scale Factor in the Plot dialog box is set to X=1 Y=1. Calibrate - Run the calibration program that comes with the Ioline control panel. For instructions on the calibration process refer to the Ioline userâs manual. Fonts are too small/large in the HEADER of the marker: ⢠Adjust the font size in the Plot Setting dialog box in the SGS programs. The plot setting dialog box is accessed by: ⢠From the FILE menu choose PLOT. ⢠Select the Setup button on the lower right of the dialog box. ⢠Enter the desired font size in the Default Font Size box. ⢠Click OK. ! Note: If you change the font size and the fonts are still plotting incorrectly, delete the Optikad.ini file located in the Windows directory and re- configure plot settings. Piece Information fonts are too large or too small: ⢠From the SGS MARK program, select the PIECE pulldown Menu, then select GLOBAL INFO. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 391 ⢠On the right hand side of the Global pieces information dialog box, locate the box called, âAdjust Descriptions.â ⢠Enter in the desired maximum text size. For example, if the text was previously too large when set to 1â, change the setting to .5â and click APPLY. ⢠Create a test plot to make sure the new text size is acceptable. If further changes are necessary, repeat steps 1 - 3. ! Note: This setting adjusts the maximum text size for the standard piece information (or piece descriptions). On larger pieces, the text will plot at the maximum set size. On smaller pieces, text will plot smaller to fit on the piece. Internal fonts are too large or too small: ⢠From the SGS MARK program, select the PIECE pull down Menu, then select GLOBAL INFO. ⢠On the right hand side of the Global pieces information dialog box, locate the box called, âInternal Texts.â ⢠Enter in the desired minimum and maximum sizes. For example, if internal text should only be between .25â and 1â, set this box accordingly. Internal text will plot no smaller than .25â and no larger than 1â. ⢠Create a test plot to make sure text is acceptable. If further changes are necessary, repeat steps 1 - 3. ! Note: This setting adjusts the text size for internal texts (text added with the text tool). Mark Manual392 Leaves too much or not enough gap between jobs/copies: Check the Gap after Plotting setting in the Plot Setting dialog box. The Plot Setting dialog box can be accessed by: ⢠From the FILE menu choose PLOT. ⢠Select the Setup button on the lower right of the Plot dialog box. ⢠Enter in a new value in the Gap After Plotting box. ⢠Click OK. Pen rips the paper during plot: Make sure pen is loaded correctly (it must be lined up on the edges of the roll feeds). Check the pen force. Pen may be out of ink. Pen may be broken. Paper pressure roller must not be placed over the two connection points of the paper advance bar. Plots very Slowly: Make sure the file format is set up correctly. For more troubleshooting tips refer to the Ioline userâs guide. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 393 Plotter Technology Plotter Configuring SGS Programs Plot Setup The Plotter Setup command is used to select the location of the OutMan.ini and the plotter. ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area. ⢠From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. Plot dialog box will display. ⢠Enable the âUse Output Managerâ. A small âxâ should appear in the box. ⢠For OutMan users: If an OutMan.ini location does not appear in the box, select Browse and Select the directory that contains the OutMan.ini. Select the Plotter number to be assigned to the Plotter Technology Neon plotter. ⢠Click OK. Plot ⢠From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will display. ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working area. Output Manager Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter. Mark Manual394 Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are optional, but are usually checked on. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to the Plotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial. Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale. Options - Set to Plot Continuous. Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1. Bulge â Set to .008 Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size. ⢠Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size. The Plot Setting dialog box will display. Plot Setting Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of the plotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS software installation. Format - Plotter Language. Set to HP-GL PlotTec. Device Options (0,0) in Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked). Manual Page Replace - Should be disabled (unchecked). Number of Pens - Set to 1. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 395 Font Options Use Plotterâs Built-in Font - Should be disabled. (Unchecked) Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file. If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file. Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the plot. ! Note: This setting overrides the plot font settings specified elsewhere in the program. Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots. Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Plotter Technology plotters. Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. Plotter Page Size Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factory setting is 72 inches. Adjust this setting according to the paper size you are using. X- The X value should always be set to 20 inches for a 36â Neon The X value should always be set to 30 inches for a 72â Neon ! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount of paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 20 or 30 inches. There is no way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the Mark Manual396 plotter. If this setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot at all. ⢠Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box. ⢠Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but the plot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not been setup. The SGS software has been configured. The next step is to configure the OutMan and the Qman. The OutMan and QMan were added to the Startup group when SGS software was installed, which means they will start automatically when Windows is started. Configuring the output manger Using the OutMan as output manger ⢠Open the OutMan by double clicking on the icon at the OUTPUT CONTROL sub directory. It can be found in START > OPTIEX 8> OUTPUT CONTROL Working Units From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The working units dialog box will display. ⢠Choose the appropriate setting. ⢠Click OK. Communication ⢠From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. The Communication dialog box will display. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 397 Port Options Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected. Baud Rate = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Parity = None Stop Bits = 1 Flow = RTS/CTS is checked. Xon/Xoff is checked Protocol = None. Paper Size ⢠Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display. ⢠Enter the Width and Length of the paper. ⢠Click OK. ! Note: If the exact paper length is unknown, estimate. The length of the paper needs to be longer than the file that will be plotted. ⢠Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close OutMan Using the OCC as output manger ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably COM1 or COM2. ! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4 or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and modem. Mark Manual398 ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. ⢠Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line. ⢠Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START menu. ⢠In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP ⢠In the plotters setup box click on ADD. ⢠Select the âmy computerâ option. Click NEXT. ⢠In the âCommunication Settingâ select the following: Port Options Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected. Baud Rate = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Parity = None Stop Bits = 1 Flow = RTS/CTS is checked. Xon/Xoff is checked Protocol = None. ⢠Click NEXT. ⢠Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application. Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 399 ! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer. ⢠Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation. ⢠Close or minimize the OCC window Hints Use cardboard for the paper take-up roll â PVC is too heavy. If using Heat Seal paper, set the plotter speed to low. When changing to a new roll of Heat Seal paper, swipe the surface that the paper would touch with a rag lightly dampened with liquid fabric softener. (This reduces the static electricity that the Heat Seal paper generates). Mark Manual400 Calcomp TechJet 720 Plotter Connecting the plotter ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter to COM1 or COM2 on the computer. ! Note: On many computers, COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ, and COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial port devices you may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. For detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows manuals for the system. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. ! Note: The Calcomp TechJet 720 Plotter must be set up in AutoSence mode. Configuring output manger Using the Outman as output manger ⢠In the START menu, click OptiTex, and OUTMAN. ⢠From the OPTIONS menu, select WORKING UNITS. ⢠Choose the appropriate setting. Click OK. ⢠From the OPTIONS menu, select COMMUNICATION. Set the following port options. Port - Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected. Baud Rate - 9600 Data Bits - 8 Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 401 Parity - None Stop Bits - 1 DTR/DSR - unchecked RTS/CTS - unchecked Xon/Xoff - checked Protocol - NONE. ⢠Click OK. ⢠Click SET next to Paper on Roll dialog box. ⢠Enter the Width and Length of the paper. Click OK. ! Note: The length of the paper needs to be longer than the plot you wish to send. ⢠Minimize the OutMan. (Do not close OutMan). Configuring QMan ⢠In the START menu click OPTITEX 8, and QMan. ⢠From the OPTIONS menu, choose WORKING UNITS. ⢠Choose the appropriate setting. Click OK. ⢠From the OPTIONS menu, select OUTMAN PATH. ⢠The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same as specified in the Plot Setup. ⢠Minimize the QMan. (Do not close QMan). Mark Manual402 Using the OCC as output manger ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably COM1 or COM2. ! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4 or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and modem. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. ⢠Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line. ⢠Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START menu. ⢠In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP ⢠In the plotters setup box click on ADD. ⢠Select the âmy computerâ option. Click NEXT. ⢠In the âCommunication Settingâ select the following: Port - Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected. Baud Rate - 9600 Data Bits - 8 Parity - None Stop Bits - 1 DTR/DSR - unchecked Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 403 RTS/CTS - unchecked Xon/Xoff - checked Protocol - NONE. ⢠Click NEXT. ⢠Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application. Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH. ! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer. ⢠Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation. ⢠Close or minimize the OCC window Configuring SGS Software Plot Setup ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working area. ⢠From the FILE menu, select the PLOT command. ⢠Click Use Output Manager field. Select the output manger that you using. ⢠For Outman users: Select the directory that contains the OutMan.ini ⢠Select the Plotter number to be assigned to the Calcomp TechJet 720. Mark Manual404 ⢠Click OK. Plot dialog box ⢠From the FILE menu, select PLOT. ⢠In the PLOT dialog box, select following boxes: Use â checked Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, copies - optional. Options - Set to Plot Continuous. Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1. Plotter Setting -Shows the Plotter language, Length and Width of page size. ! Note: Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size. The Plot Setting dialog box is displayed. Plotter Setup dialog box Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2 Format â HPGL (0,0) in Page Center â unchecked Manual Page Replace â checked Use CR/LF in code â checked Use M70 â unchecked Use bitefeed offset â unchecked Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 405 Gap After Plotting - amount of space left between plots. Minimal Cut/Plot Line â 0 Use Plotterâs Built-in Font â checked Plotter Font File - eng.fnt file and itâs directory. If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file. Default Font Size - size of the text to the plot. Number of Pen â 0 Min. Plot Spline Segment - .008 Plotter Page Size - X- 48 inches, Y-34.8 or width of paper. ⢠Click OK to exit the PLOTTER SETUP dialog box. ⢠Click OK to exit the PLOT dialog box. ! Note: The Calcomp TechJet 720 plotter model 5436R does not automatically advance the paper after each frame. The user must select CONTINUE at the plotter after each frame. A one-inch gap is placed between each frame (paper advance). ! Note: Calcompâs technical support number is 1-800-458-5888. ! Note: The Calcomp 907/PCI Vector mode driver sometimes works in the SGS OptiMark Mark Manual406 Gerber AP300 and AP310 Plotters ! Note: It is not necessary to install any Gerber Software Configuring the output manger Using the Outman as output manger ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably COM1 or COM2. ! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4 or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and modem. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. ⢠Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line. ⢠Open the Outman and in the OPTIONS Menu, select the desired WORKING UNITS. ⢠In the OPTIONS Menu, select COMMUNICATION. ⢠In the Communication Dialog Box select the following: Port : the port to which the plotter is connected Baud Rate : 9600 Data Bits :8 Parity : None Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 407 Stop Bits : 1 Flow Control : turn all of these options OFF (no check marks) Communication Protocol : Gerber ⢠Minimize the Outman. (Do not close Outman.) Configuring the Qman ⢠Open the Qman and from the OPTIONS Menu, select the desired WORKING UNITS. ⢠In the OPTIONS Menu, select OUTMAN SETUP. ⢠In the OUTMAN SETUP dialog box, select Outman.ini located in the directory where the SGS software was loaded. (The default directory is C:\Optitex) ⢠Select PLTR1 in the Plotter Name area. (If you have more than one plotter, select the desired plotter number) ⢠Minimize the Qman. (Do not close Qman) Using the OCC as output manger ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably COM1 or COM2. Mark Manual408 ! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4 or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and modem. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. ⢠Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line. ⢠Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START menu. ⢠In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP ⢠In the plotters setup box click on ADD. ⢠Select the âmy computerâ option. Click NEXT. ⢠In the âCommunication Settingâ select the following: Port : the port to which the plotter is connected Baud Rate : 9600 Data Bits :8 Parity : None Stop Bits : 1 Flow Control : turn all of these options OFF (no check marks) Communication Protocol: Gerber ⢠Click NEXT. ⢠Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application. Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 409 ! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer. ⢠Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation. ⢠Close or minimize the OCC window. Configuring the Plotter in SGS Software Once the plotter is configured and the serial port communications have been adjusted, SGS software is configured to use the plotter. ⢠Start the SGS PDS or MARK software. ⢠From the FILE menu, select PLOTT. ⢠Check the Use Output Manager field. ⢠Select the output manger that you using. ⢠For Outman users: Put the correct Outman.ini Path and plotter number in the OUTMAN MANAGER field. Select OK. ⢠Display a pattern piece on the screen. ⢠From the FILE menu, select PLOT. In the PLOTTER/CUTTER section of the PLOT dialog box, select SETUP. ⢠In the DRIVER FORMAT field of the PLOT SETTING dialog box, select AP-GL Gerber Plotter. In Plotter Page Size, the X must be 16.25 (the frame size) and the Y must be the width of the paper. (72 inches is the maximum) ⢠Select OK in the PLOT SETTINGS dialog box. Mark Manual410 ⢠The following settings should be checked: Output Manager- Use Alert on Start Remove on End Alert on End ⢠Select OK in the PLOT dialog box. Troubleshooting If nothing happens If you get an error message at the plotter display If the plotter does not move It is probably a communication problem. Recheck your hardware communication, recheck the setup of the parameters in the output manager, or try replacing the plotter cable. If the plotter reacts (something moves) but not correctly Recheck the format setup and the frame dimensions. Try to plot a smaller marker with only one piece that is smaller than one frame. Tips The plotter side of the communication cable is a 9 pin female adapter. The computer side of the cable is a 25 pin female adapter, Gerber part number 055409000 Rev.-A. A 25 to 9 pin adapter may be necessary in order to attach the cable to the computer. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 411 Gerber AP700 Plotter ! Note: It is not necessary to install any Gerber Software Configuring the output manger Using the Outman as output manger ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably COM1 or COM2. ! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4 or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and modem. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. ⢠Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line. Power on- Big red button to the right. Press ENTERS to enable (dot with a circle around it) Initialize F2 (goes to origin) F1 (goes on-line) ⢠Open the Outman and in the OPTIONS Menu, select the desired WORKING UNITS. ⢠In the OPTIONS Menu, select COMMUNICATION. ⢠In the Communication Dialog Box select the following: Mark Manual412 Port - the port to which the plotter is connected Baud Rate - 9600 Data Bits - 8 Parity - None Stop Bits - 1 Flow Control turn all of these options OFF (no check marks) Communicate Protocol: Gerber ⢠Minimize the Outman. (Do not close Outman). Configuring the Qman ⢠Open the Qman and in the OPTIONS Menu, select the desired WORKING UNITS. ⢠In the OPTIONS Menu, select OUTMAN PATH SETUP. ⢠In the OUTMAN SETUP dialog box, select Outman.ini located in the directory where the SGS software was loaded. (The default directory is C:\Optitex) ⢠Select PLTR1 in the Plotter Name area. (If you have more than one plotter, select the desired plotter number) ⢠Minimize the Qman. (Do not close Qman) Using the OCC as output manger ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably COM1 or COM2. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 413 ! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4 or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and modem. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. ⢠Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line. ⢠Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START menu. ⢠In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP ⢠In the plotters setup box click on ADD. ⢠Select the âmy computerâ option. Click NEXT. ⢠In the âCommunication Settingâ select the following: Port - the port to which the plotter is connected Baud Rate - 9600 Data Bits - 8 Parity - None Stop Bits - 1 Flow Control turn all of these options OFF (no check marks) Communication Protocol: Gerber ⢠Click NEXT. ⢠Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application. Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH. Mark Manual414 ! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer. ⢠Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation. ⢠Close or minimize the OCC window. Configuring the Plotter in SGS Software Once the plotter is configured and the serial port communications have been adjusted, SGS software is configured to use the plotter. ⢠Start the SGS PDS or MARK software. ⢠From the FILE menu, select PLOT command ⢠Check the Use Output Manager field. ⢠Select the output manger that you using. ⢠For Outman users: Put the correct Outman.ini Path and plotter number in the OUTMAN MANAGER field. Select OK. ⢠Display a pattern piece on the screen. ⢠From the FILE menu, select PLOT. In the PLOTTER/CUTTER section of the PLOT dialog box, select SETUP. ⢠In the DRIVER FORMAT field of the PLOT SETTING dialog box, select AP-GL Gerber Plotter. In Plotter Page Size, the X must be 16.25 (the frame size) and the Y must be the width of the paper. (72 inches is the maximum) ⢠Select OK in the PLOT SETTINGS dialog box. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 415 ⢠The following settings should be checked: Output Manager- Use Alert on Start Remove on End Alert on End ⢠Select OK in the PLOT dialog box. Troubleshooting If nothing happens If you get an error message at the plotter display If the plotter does not move It is probably a communication problem. Recheck your hardware communication, recheck the setup of the parameters in the output manager, or try replacing the plotter cable. If the plotter reacts (something moves) but not correctly Recheck the format setup and the frame dimensions. Try to plot a smaller marker with only one piece that is smaller than one frame. Tips The AP700 has the serial port on the INSIDE of the plotter. It is necessary to remove some screws in order to find the port. The AP700 plotter cable is a 25 pin female on computer side and 25 pin on plotter side, Gerber part number 050225-002, E dated 11-89 DSC. A 25 to 9 pin adapter may be necessary in order to attach the cable to the computer. Mark Manual416 NovaJet Plotter Connecting the plotter ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer. ! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identified as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4. ! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on many computers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ and COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices you may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. For detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows manuals for your system. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. Configuring SGS Programs for the NovaJet Plot Setup The Plotter Setup command is used to select the location of the OutMan.ini and the plotter. ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area. ⢠From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will display. ⢠Enable the âUse Output Managerâ A small âxâ should appear in the box. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 417 ⢠For OutMan users: If an OutMan.ini location does not appear in the box, select Browse and Select the directory that contains the OutMan.ini. Select the Plotter number assigned to the NovaJet ⢠Click OK. Plot ⢠From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will display. ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working area. Output Manager Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter. Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are optional. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to the Plotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial. Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale. Options - Set to Plot Continuous. Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1. Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size. ⢠Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size. The Plot Setting dialog box will display. Mark Manual418 Plot Setting Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of the plotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS software installation. Format - Plotter Language. Set to HPGL Device Options (0,0) in Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked). Manual Page Replace - Should be disabled (unchecked). Number of Pens - Set to 1. Font Options Use Plotterâs Built-in Font - Should be enabled (checked). Plotter Font File - Should be grayed out if using plotterâs built in font. If not using the plotterâs built in font , the Plot-eng.fnt file and itâs directory should be displayed. If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file. Default Font Size - This setting determines the default size of the text on the plot. ! Note: This setting overrides the plot font settings specified elsewhere in the program. Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots. Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Ioline plotters. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 419 Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. Plotter Page Size Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factory setting is 72 inches. Adjust this setting according to the paper size you are using. X- The X value should always be set to 35.6â. *See your NovaJet manual for frame size. The size varies depending on the model of the NovaJet. ! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount of paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 35.6 inches. There is no way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot at all. ⢠Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box. ⢠Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but the plot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not been setup. Configuring the output manger Using the OutMan as output manger. ⢠Open the OutMan by clicking on the OutMan icon in the START menu. The icon can be found in the OUTPUT CONTROL folder at OptiTex 8 menu. Mark Manual420 Working Units From the OPTIONS menu, choose WORKING UNITS. The working units dialog box will display. ⢠Choose the appropriate setting. ⢠Click OK. Communication ⢠From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. The Communication dialog box will display. Port Options Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected. Baud Rate = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Parity = None Stop Bits = 1 Flow = HPGL HPGL DTR/DSR = Enabled (checked) RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked) Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked) Protocol = NONE. Paper Size ⢠Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display. ⢠Enter the Width and Length of the paper. ⢠Click OK. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 421 ! Note: If the exact paper length is unknown, estimate. The length of the paper needs to be longer than the file that will be plotted. ⢠Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close OutMan Configuring Qman ⢠Click on START > Optitex 8 > OUTPUT CONTROL > QMAN Working Units ⢠From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS. ⢠Select the appropriate units. The selection should match the working units set in the SGS plot dialog box. ⢠From the FILE menu, choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan Setup dialog box will display. Path Setup The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not: ⢠Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list of available drive/directories on the right. ⢠Click OK. ⢠Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close Qman. Mark Manual422 Using the OCC as output manger ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably COM1 or COM2. ! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4 or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and modem. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. ⢠Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line. ⢠Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START menu. ⢠In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP ⢠In the plotters setup box click on ADD. ⢠Select the âmy computerâ option. Click NEXT. ⢠In the âCommunication Settingâ select the following: Port Options Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected. Baud Rate = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Parity = None Stop Bits = 1 Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 423 Flow = HPGL HPGL DTR/DSR = Enabled (checked) RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked) Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked) Protocol = NONE. ⢠Click NEXT. ⢠Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application. Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH. ! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer. ⢠Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation. ⢠Close or minimize the OCC window Mark Manual424 Numonics Design Partner 9000 Plotter Connecting the plotter ⢠Turn your computer off. ⢠Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer. ! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identified as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4. ! Note: Any serial port can be used however, keep in mind that on many computers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ, and COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices you may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. For detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows manuals for your system. ⢠Turn the computer on. ⢠Turn the plotter on. Configuring the SGS progrem Plot Setup ! Note: To access the Plot command you must have something in the working area. ⢠From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot Select dialog box will be displayed. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 425 ⢠Enable the âUse Output Managerâ. A checkmark will be placed in the box. ⢠For OutMan users: If an OutMan.ini location does not appear in the box select Browse and Select the directory that contains the OutMan.ini. .assign the plotter number. ⢠Click OK. Plot ⢠From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will be displayed. ! Note: To access the Plot command you must have something in the working area. Output Manager Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter. Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are optional. For detailed information on each of these options refer to the Plotting chapter of the userâs guide, or the plotting tutorial. Page Format - Page format should be set to Fixed Scale. Scale Factor - Should be set to X=1 Y=1. Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size. ⢠Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size. The Plot Setting dialog box will be displayed. Mark Manual426 Plot Setting Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of Pltr listing depends on how many plotters you specified during software installation. Format - Plotter Language. Should be set to Design Partner Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots to enable cutting between the plots. Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for the Ioline plotters. Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. Plotter Page Size X - The X value should be the frame size. Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factory setting is 72 inches, you will need to adjust according to the paper size you are using. ! Note: The Frame Size of the plotter meaning this is the amount of paper the plotter feeds and tracks at a time. There is no way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this setting is set to anything else the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot at all. ⢠Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 427 ⢠Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but the plot will not be sent because the OutMan and QueMan have not been setup. Configuring the output manger Using the OutMan as output manger ⢠Click on the OutMan icon at the START menu. It can be found at START > OptiTex 8 >OUTPUT CONTROL Working Units ⢠From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The working units dialog box will be displayed. ⢠Choose the setting you wish to use. ⢠Click OK. Communication ⢠From the OPTIONS menu choose COMMUNICATION. The Communication dialog box will be displayed. Port Options Port = Select the COM port you have the plotter connected to. Baud Rate = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Parity = None Stop Bits = 1 Flow = DTR/DSR = Not enabled (no check in the box) RTS/CTS = Enabled (check in box.) Xon/Xoff = Not enabled (no check in the box) Mark Manual428 Paper Size ⢠Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will be displayed. ⢠Enter the Width and Length of the paper you are using. ⢠Click OK. ! Note: If you are using a roll of paper and donât know the exact length, estimate. The length of the paper needs to be longer than the plot you wish to send. ⢠Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Configuring QueMan ⢠Click on the Qman icon in the START menu. It can be found at START> OptiTex 8> OUTPUT CONTROL > QMAN Working Units ⢠From the FILE menu choose WORKING UNITS. ⢠Select the same setting you selected in the OptiTex plot setup. OutMan Path Setup ⢠From the OPTION menu choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan Setup dialog box will be displayed. The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not: ⢠Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list of available drive/directories on the right. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 429 ⢠Click OK ⢠Minimize the QueMan keeping it running. Using the OCC as output manger ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably COM1 or COM2. ! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4 or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and modem. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. ⢠Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line. ⢠Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START menu. ⢠In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP ⢠In the plotters setup box click on ADD. ⢠Select the âmy computerâ option. Click NEXT. ⢠In the âCommunication Settingâ select the following: Port Options Port = Select the COM port you have the plotter connected to. Mark Manual430 Baud Rate = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Parity = None Stop Bits = 1 Flow = DTR/DSR = Not enabled (no check in the box) RTS/CTS = Enabled (check in box.) Xon/Xoff = Not enabled (no check in the box) ⢠Click NEXT. ⢠Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application. Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH. ! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer. ⢠Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 431 Summagraphic HighPlot 7100/7200 Plotter Connecting the plotter ⢠Turn your computer off. ⢠Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer. ! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identified as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4. ! Note: Any serial port can be used however, keep in mind that on many computers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ, and COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices you may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. For detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows manuals for your system. ⢠Turn the computer on. ⢠Turn the plotter on. Configuring the SGS programs. Plot Setup The Plotter Setup command is used to select the location of the OutMan.ini and the plotter you want to use. ! Note: To access the Plot command you must have something in the working area. ⢠From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will be displayed. Mark Manual432 ⢠Enable the Use Output Manager. A checkmark will be placed in the box. ⢠For OutMan users: If an OutMan.ini location does not appear in the box select Browse and locate the directory that contains the OutMan.ini Select the Pltr. number you want to assign to the Ioline. ⢠Click OK. Plot ⢠From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will be displayed. ! Note: To access the Plot command you must have something in the working area. Output Manager Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter. Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are optional. For detailed information on each of these options refer to the Plotting chapter of the userâs guide, or the plotting tutorial. Page Format - Page format should be set to Fixed Scale. Options - Should be set to Plot Continuous. Scale Factor - Should be set to X=1 Y=1. Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size. ⢠Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size. The Plot Setting dialog box will be displayed. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 433 Plot Setting Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of Pltr listing depends on how many plotters you specified during software installation. Format - Plotter Language. Should be set to DMPL, HPGL/2 or HPGL Generic. DMPL is recommended. Font Options Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots to enable cutting between the plots. Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for the Ioline plotters. Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. Plotter Page Size X - The X value should always be set to the plotter frame size. Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factory setting is 72 inches, you will need to adjust according to the paper size you are using. ! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter meaning this is the amount of paper the plotter feeds and tracks at a time. There is no way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this setting is set to anything else the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot at all. ⢠Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box. Mark Manual434 ⢠Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but the plot will not be sent because the OutMan and QueMan have not been setup. Configuring the output manger Using the OutMan as output manger ⢠Open the OutMan by double clicking on the icon at the START menu. It can be found at START> OPTIETX 8> OUTPUT CONTROL> OUTMAN. Working Units ⢠From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The working units dialog box will be displayed. ⢠Choose the setting you wish to use. ⢠Click OK. Communication ⢠From the OPTIONS menu choose COMMUNICATION. The Communication dialog box will be displayed. Port Options Port = Select the COM port you have the plotter connected to. Baud Rate = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Parity = None Stop Bits = 1 Paper Size ⢠Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will be displayed. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 435 ⢠Enter the Width and Length of the paper you are using. ⢠Click OK. ! Note: If you are using a roll of paper and donât know the exact length, estimate. The length of the paper needs to be longer than the plot you wish to send. ⢠Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Configuring the Qman ⢠Open the QueMan by double clicking on the icon at the START menu. It can be found at START>OPTITEX 8> OUTPUT CONTROL> QMAN Working Units ⢠From the FILE menu choose WORKING UNITS. ⢠Select the same setting you selected in the OptiTex plot setup. OutMan Path Setup ⢠From the FILE menu choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan Setup dialog box will be displayed. The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not: ⢠Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list of available drive/directories on the right. ⢠Click OK Mark Manual436 Using the OCC as output manger ⢠Turn off the computer. ⢠Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably COM1 or COM2. ! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4 or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and modem. ⢠Turn on the computer and the plotter. ⢠Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line. ⢠Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START menu. ⢠In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP ⢠In the plotters setup box click on ADD. ⢠Select the âmy computerâ option. Click NEXT. ⢠In the âCommunication Settingâ select the following: Port Options Port = Select the COM port you have the plotter connected to. Baud Rate = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Parity = None Stop Bits = 1 Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 437 ⢠Click NEXT. ⢠Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application. Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH. ! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer. ⢠Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation. Close or minimize the OCC window Mark Manual438 Lectra plotter Connecting Lectra Plotter to your Computer In order to connect "Lectra" plotter to your computer you need to have a special cross 25 pins serial cable. This is the serial cable schema: "Lectra" Plotter pins number: You Computer pins number: "Lectra" Plotter is using only 4 pins on the 25 pins serial cable. Pin number 1 in Lectra go to pin number 1 on your computer. Pin number 2 in Lectra go to pin number 2 on your computer. Pin number 3 in Lectra go to pin number 3 on your computer. Pin number 7 in Lectra go to pin number 5 on your computer. ! Note: Lectra pin number 7 is a ground, on a new PC computer pin number 8 can be the ground connection! This means that to need connect Lectra pin number 7 to pin number 8 on the PC!! In order to drive "Lectra" plotter you need create this kind of 25 pins serial cable!! Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 439 Where to connect your serial cable in "Lectra" plotter: "Lectra" plotter module E32 or E33 has 7 serial COM output connects. One of those 7 output connectors goes in to "Lectra" terminal. The terminal connection is a flat serial cable with only 4 pins, you need to disconnect this terminal cable and connect the terminal connection directly to you computer. Don't put your cable in the terminal connections on the plotter, connect the terminal to your computer directly with your special crossed serial cable. Now you can plot to your "Lectra" plotter. In order to initialize the plotter you don't need "Lectra" terminal (you can use "Lectra" terminal if you want to calibrate your plotter). OptiTex communication driver will initialize the plotter and set the pen position to point 0.0! Warnings: ⢠The default frame size is Y- 180 and X- 35. The frame size can change (in case you are driving Lectra E-32 machine) from OptiTex plot dialog box. ⢠The emergency stop button on the plotter is not supported. Once you stopped the plotting. With the stop button, you have to re-send the whole file again. ⢠The Lectra Terminal is disabled once you use OptiTex. ⢠OptiTex Lectra driver will initialize automatically before starting to plot. How to Create Lectra Plot file in OptiTex version 8: ⢠After you finish nesting your pieces and you're ready to plot, go to Plot dialog box. Mark Manual440 ⢠Check and enable "Use Output manager" option, select "OCC" ("output manager service") section and press the Setup button. ⢠"Plotter Setup" dialog will be appearing. Note: if you are working with Win98 or Win95 you will need to install OptiTex and reboot the computer in order to replace msvcrt.dll and msvcp60.dll in your Windows system folder. Without replacing these *.DLL the "Plotter Setup" dialog will work! ⢠Press the "Add" button to create a new plotter name and plotter queue. ⢠To select a computer: select network or local computer (in order to select a network computer you need to have a network computer that already has a shared plotter queue) and then press "Next". ! Note: The enclosed explanation describes a local computer selection track. ⢠In the next dialog "Communication Setting" select "Lectra protocol" and the relevant COM port, DO NOT change any others communication parameters and press the "next" button. ⢠The next dialog is a "Local Plotter Setting". In the plotter name Dialog box, write your plotter name. You can use any name but we suggest using "Lectra". (Donât change the queue path for sharing, if your operating system is not NT, you will need to define the share queue folder manually, if you want other computers on the network to be able to plot to your plotter.) Press "finish" button. ⢠Now you're back to the main "Plotter Setup" dialog window. Select your new plotter (Lectra) and press on "default button. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 441 ⢠Close "Plotter Setup" dialog with "Close" button. ⢠If the plotter queue that you've just created is new, the "Plotter/Cutter Setup" dialog will open automatically. Select from the driver format "Lectra Flat Bed Plotter" driver. Don't change the plotter page size! It's recommended to use OptiTex font and not the Plotter font (don't use "use build - in font" option). ⢠Confirm your setting with Ok button. Now you're in "Plot" dialog box and here you will see "Alert on start" option. If this option is checked, the job that you are sending to the plotter is in "Hold" attribute on the âOCC ". ⢠Confirm your settings and send the job to the plotter by pressing the Ok button. Now the âOCC âwill open. How to use âOCC "(Output Control Center): The " OCC " is the OptiTex new output system and in order to drive "Lectra" plotter you need to work with the "OCC". The new âOCC " supports "Lectra" communication driver. ⢠When the "OCC " is loaded (after you press the "plot" dialog box "ok" button), you will see your plotter name in the "OCC" left side under "All queues" header and your current job (the plotting data) will be in the "OCC" right side under "Jobs". ⢠If you job status is hold (remember "Alert on start" option in "Plot" dialog is checked) then in order to send the job to the plotter, press on the "green flag" icon on the tool bar and your job will be send to the plotter. ⢠In order to "re-send" a job you can go to "Done" under the queue name on the âOCC " left side, select the job and press the "restart" Mark Manual442 button on " OCC " tool bar. You can also delete a job, stop a job and sort jobs. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 443 Configuring the Cutting Edge Cutter Connect the cutter The cutter must be assembled and installed. Install the Cutting Edge Software Cutting Edge uses the Base module software to drive the cutter. Configuring the SGS Grade, SGS PDS, or SGS Mark software ⢠From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working area. ⢠In the PLOT dialog box, select following boxes: Use â checked Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies - optional. Options -Set to Plot Continuous. Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1. Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language, Length and Width of page size. ! Note: Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size. The Plot Setting dialog box will display. Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. Format - Cutting Edge Mark Manual444 (0,0) In Page Center â unchecked Manual Page Replace â checked Use CR/LF in code â checked Use M70 â unchecked Use bitefeed offset â unchecked Gap After Plotting - amount of space left between plots. Minimal Cut/Plot Line - 0 Plotter Font File - eng.fnt file and itâs directory. If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file. Default Font Size - size of the text to the plot. Number of Pen â 0 Min. Plot Spline Segment = .008 Plotter Page Size = X- longer than maximum marker Y- useable width of paper minus margins ! Note: âPage Sizeâ is the terminology generally used for plotters. However, in the case of cutters, page size refers to the dimensions of the area that the cutter cuts. If the Page Size setting is smaller than the marker size when creating an NC file, the file will be blank. ⢠Click OK to exit the PLOTTER SETUP dialog box. ⢠Click OK to exit the PLOT dialog box. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 445 Tips Buttons with drill attributes work best when exporting to a Cutting Edge cutter. Using an AUX Drill attribute on buttons will execute a CUT command at the cutter. Using a Drill attribute on buttons will execute a DRILL command at the cutter. Using a Cut attribute on buttons will execute a DRILL command at the cutter. Using a Draw attribute on buttons will execute an INK command at the cutter. I notches with cut attributes work best when exporting to a Cutting Edge cutter. T notches will draw as I notches at the cutter. U, V, L, and box notches will cut the same shape at the cutter. Operational Stops insert an M01 command at the cutter that causes the cutter to pause before or after execution. Darts will display as INK commands. The way that darts are displayed in the SGS software determines how darts are displayed at the cutting edge machine. When requesting the .NC file from the Mark software, Axis lines (pleats) display as solid INK lines. When requesting the .NC file from the PDS software, Axis lines (pleats) display as INK notches at the beginning and end of the line. Internal lines display as INK or CUT lines depending on how the line attributes are set in the SGS software. Mark Manual446 Piece Descriptions and internal text display as ANNOTATION at the Cutting Edge machine. If the Base line is displayed in the SGS software, the baseline will display as an INK command at the cutting edge machine. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 447 Eastman Cutter There are several steps to follow when using the Eastman Cutter with the SGS software: ⢠Installing the Eastman EasyCut program; ⢠Creating a .GBR file from Scanvec software; ⢠Importing the SGS .GBR file into Eastman software and cutting the file. This document provides information for step 2 above. For steps 1 and 3, please refer to Eastman documentation. Configuring SGS software This document gives basic settings and configuration instructions used for Eastman cutters. Plot ⢠From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will display. ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece or a marker in the working area. File Name - Type in the name and path of the file. For example, if the file is to be sent to a floppy diskette, type: A:\filename If the file is to be sent to a directory on the C drive, type: C:\directoryname\filename Mark Manual448 Output Manager - Use Output Manager, Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End -Disable all of these options. Page Format Single and Multiple- Disable (uncheck). Fixed Scale - Enable (checked). Options Plot Continuous - Enable (checked). Scale Factor X=1 Y=1 Check Intersections, Order by Tools, and One Page -Disable all of these options. Bulge - Set at .008 Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size. ⢠Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size. The Plot Setting dialog box will display. Plot Setting Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of the plotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS software installation. Format - Plotter Language should be set to Eastman Cutter. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 449 Device Options (0,0) In Page Center - Disable (unchecked). Number of Pens -Set at 0. Manual Page Replace - Disable (unchecked). Use CR/LF in code -Enable (checked) Use M70 - Disable (unchecked). Use bite feed offset - Disable (unchecked). Font Options Use Plotterâs Built-in Font -Enable (checked) Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory. If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file. Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the plot. ! Note: This setting overrides the plot font settings specified elsewhere in the program. Gap After Plotting - Set at 0. Minimal Cut/Plot Line - Set at 0. Min. Plot Spline Segment- This setting determines the smallest spline or arc to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. Mark Manual450 Plotter Page Size X =128 The X value represents the frame size or table length. Y = 43.5 The Y value represents the width of the material. ! Note: Be sure to set this setting correctly. If is set incorrectly, the cutter will not cut or will cut incorrectly. ⢠Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box. ⢠Click OK in the Plot dialog box. A .GBR file has now been generated and should be located under the path and file name that was entered at the beginning of this section under âFile Name.â Tips 1/4 inch T notches with a cut and no stop attribute cut best at the Eastman cutter. Buttons with a Drill M43 attribute cut best at the cutter. Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 451 Configuring the Gerber Cutter S3250 Connect the cutter The cutter must be assembled and installed. Install the Gerber Software Gerber uses the Power Processor software to drive the cutter. Configuring the SGS software ⢠From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working area. ⢠In the PLOT dialog box, select following boxes: (Use = checked) Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies = optional Page Format = fixed scale Options = Set to Plot Continuous. Scale Factor = Set to X=1 Y=1 Whole pieces in frame only Check intersections before plotting Optimize Plot/Cut Order Mark Manual452 Plotter Setting = Shows the Plotter language, Length and Width of page size. ! Note: Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size. The Plot Setting dialog box will display. Name = Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. Format = Gerber Cutter (0,0) in Page Center = unchecked Manual Page Replace = unchecked Use CR/LF in code = unchecked *Use initialization in file header (M70â¦) = checked Use Bitefeed Offset = unchecked (if using Version 7.x. If using a lower version: *Use bitefeed offset = checked, -.50) Gap After Plotting = amount of space left between plots. Minimal Cut/Plot Line = 0 Use Plotterâs Built-in Font = unchecked Plotter Font File = eng.fnt file and itâs directory. If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file. Default Font Size = size of the text to the plot. Number of Pen = 0 Min. Plot Spline Segment = .008 Plotter Page Size = X- 999 Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 453 Y- 70 (useable width of paper minus margin) ! Note: âPage Sizeâ is the terminology generally used for plotters. However, in the case of cutters, page size refers to the dimensions of the area that the cutter cuts. If the Page Size setting is smaller than the marker size when creating an NC file, the file will be blank. ⢠Click OK to exit the PLOTTER SETUP dialog box. ⢠Click OK to exit the PLOT dialog box. Tips I or V notches with cut attributes work best when exporting to a Gerber cutter Configuring the Gerber Cutter S-91 There are 3 main steps to configuring the Gerber Cutter for use with the SGS software: 1) Connecting the cutter, 2) Installing the Gerber software, 3) Configuring the SGS programs. Connect the cutter The cutter must be assembled and installed. Install the Gerber Software Gerber uses the Power Processor software to drive the cutter. Configuring the SGS Software ⢠From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. Mark Manual454 ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working area. ⢠In the PLOT dialog box, select following boxes: (Use = checked) Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies = optional Page Format = fixed scale Options = Set to Plot Continuous. Scale Factor = Set to X=1 Y=1 Whole pieces in frame only Check intersections before plotting Optimize Plot/Cut Order Plotter Setting = Shows the Plotter language, Length and Width of page size. ! Note: Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size. The Plot Setting dialog box will display. Name = Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. Format = Gerber Cutter (0,0) in Page Center = unchecked Manual Page Replace = unchecked Use CR/LF in code = unchecked Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 455 *Use initialization in file header (M70â¦) = checked *Use bitefeed offset = checked, -. 50 Gap After Plotting = amount of space left between plots. Minimal Cut/Plot Line = 0 Use Plotterâs Built-in Font = unchecked Plotter Font File = eng.fnt file and itâs directory. If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file. Default Font Size = size of the text to the plot. Number of Pen = 0 Min. Plot Spline Segment = .008 Plotter Page Size = X- 110 Y- 70 (useable width of paper minus margin) ! Note: âPage Sizeâ is the terminology generally used for plotters. However, in the case of cutters, page size refers to the dimensions of the area that the cutter cuts. If the Page Size setting is smaller than the marker size when creating an NC file, the file will be blank. ⢠Click OK to exit the PLOTTER SETUP dialog box. ⢠Click OK to exit the PLOT dialog box. Tips I or V notches with cut attributes work best when exporting to a Gerber cutter Mark Manual456 Configuring the Gerber Cutter S-93 There are 3 main steps to configuring the Gerber Cutter for use with the SGS software: 1) Connecting the cutter, 2) Installing the Gerber software, 3) Configuring the SGS programs. Connect the cutter The cutter must be assembled and installed. Install the Gerber Software Gerber uses the Power Processor software to drive the cutter. Configuring the SGS Grade, SGS PDS, or SGS Mark software ⢠From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. ! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working area. ⢠In the PLOT dialog box, select following boxes: (Use = checked) Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies = optional Page Format = fixed scale Options = Set to Plot Continuous. Scale Factor = Set to X=1 Y=1 Whole pieces in frame only Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation 457 Check intersections before plotting Optimize Plot/Cut Order Plotter Setting = Shows the Plotter language, Length and Width of page size. ! Note: Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size. The Plot Setting dialog box will display. Name = Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. Format = Gerber Cutter (0,0) in Page Center = unchecked Manual Page Replace = unchecked Use CR/LF in code = unchecked *Use initialization in file header (M70â¦) = checked *Use bitefeed offset = checked, -. 50 Gap After Plotting = amount of space left between plots. Minimal Cut/Plot Line = 0 Use Plotterâs Built-in Font = unchecked Plotter Font File = eng.fnt file and itâs directory. If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file. Default Font Size = size of the text to the plot. Number of Pen = 0 Mark Manual458 Min. Plot Spline Segment = .008 Plotter Page Size = X- 110 Y- 70 (useable width of paper minus margin) ! Note: âPage Sizeâ is the terminology generally used for plotters. However, in the case of cutters, page size refers to the dimensions of the area that the cutter cuts. If the Page Size setting is smaller than the marker size when creating a NC file, the file will be blank. ⢠Click OK to exit the PLOTTER SETUP dialog box. ⢠Click OK to exit the PLOT dialog box. Tips I or V notches with cut attributes work best when exporting to a Gerber cutter Chapter 11: Help Menu 459 Chapter 11: Help Menu The Help menu provides general information and help regarding SGS software. Index (F1) The Index command opens on-line help services provided by SGS. This is a comprehensive guide to product information including a full glossary. This command works like other on-line Help files; click on the desired topic to view related information. Information may be viewed on screen or printed out for future reference. To access on-line Help: ⢠From the Help Menu select Index or press F1. The Command Summary screen will be displayed which offers a complete listing of all the topics in the program. This on-line help program also includes a Search command, which will search by topic, and a History command, which will show a log of the recently viewed topics. Keyboard Select the Keyboard command to list an on-line help service. This option displays all of the keyboard commands that can be used in OptiTex Mark. This command works like other on-line Help files. Click on the desired topic and the screen will be displayed. You can view the topics on screen or you can print them for future reference. Mark Manual460 Using Help Select Using Help to learn the basics of using the on line help program. Check Plug Protection The Check Plug Protection option is used to view the plug (key) number. It may be necessary to look up this number when calling for technical support. Check Plug Protection also shows the SGS modules that you are entitled to use. Furthermore, when purchasing a new SGS module, the Check Plug Protection box is used to enter the codes that activate the new module. In order to activate a new module, click on the SET button to the right of the new module listed in the Check Plug Protection dialog, and then enter the two codes and click OK. About OptiTex Mark Choose the About OptiTex Mark command to find the version of software you are currently using. This information is necessary when contacting Technical Support for help with your SGS software. SGS On-Line This menu gives you the option to connect on-line to our home page to get update information or connect the technical support department. Your Internet browser will go directly to OptiTex home page when selecting the SGS HOME PAGE or SGS SUPPORT PAGE from this menu. Chapter 11: Help Menu 461 Send File This function enables you to sand a file to any e-mail adders. You can sand it to mailboxes in your company or around the world. An Internet access required. To send a file: ⢠Choose the SEND FILE command from the HELP menu. ⢠The E-MAIL dialog box appears. ⢠Enter the e-mail address that you want to send the message to. ⢠You have the option to attach more files and to add the message name and subject. Mark Manual462 ⢠Click O.K. ⢠The message with the attached files will be send to the desired address How to Contact SGS SGS Israel for international sales marketing and technical support: Scanvec Garment Systems (SGS) Ravnitzky 6 Sgula Industrial Park Petach-Tikva 49221, Israel Tel.: 972-3-904-9979 Fax: 972-3-904-2710 SGS USA for inside the US sales and marketing: ScanVec Garment Systems (SGS) International Plaza Two, Suite 625 Philadelphia, PA 19113-1518, USA Tel.: 610-521-5970 Toll free: (US & Canada) 877 RING OPTI Fax: 610-521-1564 E-Mail: E-Mail Technical Support:
[email protected] E-Mail Sales & Marketing:
[email protected] Web Site: http://www.optitex.com Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands 463 Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands Pull Down Menu Shortcut Keys As you may already know many of the commands in the pull down menus have shortcut keys that will activate them. Below you will find a summary of those shortcut commands. OptiMark Menu Commands Activation Keys File Menu: File/New Ctrl+N File/Open Marker File Ctrl+O File/ Save Marker File Ctrl+S File/Exit Alt+F4 Piece Menu: Piece/Information Ctrl+I Piece/Make Hole Ctrl+H Piece/Internals Ctrl+E Marker/Place Piece Ctrl+P Marker/Place one Set Ctrl+Shift+P Marker/Place All Ctrl+Shift+Alt+P Mark Manual464 Marker Menu: Marker/Clear Marker Ctrl+C Marker/Remove Marker Delete or Ctrl+R Marker/Duplicate marker Ctrl+D Alignment/Horizontal by Marker Center Alt+Ctrl+M Alignment/Horizontal by Upper Limit Alt+Up Alignment/Horizontal by Lower Limit Alt+Down Alignment/Horizontal by Piece Center Alt+Ctrl+H Alignment/Vertical by Left Limit Alt+Left Alignment/Vertical by Right Limit Alt+Right Alignment/Vertical by Piece Center Alt+Ctrl+V Marker/Marker Definitions Ctrl+M Marker/Placed Piece Cutter Ordering Ctrl/click left mouse button. Marker/Relate Piece to Stripes Shift+Home Marker/Undo Ctrl+Z Grouping Menu: Stripe Adjust Group Ctrl+G Block Fuse Ctrl+B Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands 465 Nesting Menu: Compact Arrangement Ctrl+J Stop Batch Command Ctrl+A Help Menu: Help/Index F1 Other Shortcut keys Listed below are many other shortcut keys. These shortcuts are not menu commands, nor are they listed elsewhere in the program. Return Piece to Piece Display Bar. Double click on piece Add and remove annotation descriptions on pieces Ctrl+T on the marker. Fill Pieces on marker with color. Ctrl+F Place a piece more times than listed on the Size List Box Ctrl+P (enable minusâ-â). Aligning the selected piece with the center of the closest placed piece on the marker. Ctrl+L Redraw Command. Ctrl+Alt+R Stop before cutting marked internal. Ctrl+Alt+B Define a piece as foldable in the Up & Down Ctrl+U Mark Manual466 Define a piece as not foldable Ctrl+Q Mirror Up Enter Mirror Right Shift + Enter Rotate 90 Right mouse button Rotate 180 Right mouse button Adjust Left Alt+4 Adjust Up Alt+8 Adjust Down Alt+2 Adjust Right Alt+6 Adjust Left-Up Alt+7 Adjust Left-Down Alt+1 Adjust Right-Down Alt+3 Adjust Right-Up Alt+9 Adjust Left 10 pixels at a time Left Arrow Adjust Right 10 pixels at a time Right Arrow Adjust Up 10 pixels at a time Up Arrow Adjust Down 10 pixels at a time Down Arrow Move overlapped pieces Click right and left mouse button simultaneously Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands 467 Tilt to the right F12 Tilt to the left F11 Uses of the Right Mouse Button The left mouse button is the most frequently used button in OptiMark. The right mouse button is used very infrequently, but it can be used at times to activate shortcut commands. They are listed as follows. Rotating Pieces with the Mouse If the appropriate options are selected in the Piece Info dialog box, the right mouse button can be used to rotate a piece 2 way or 4 way. Place the piece on the marker, move the cursors on top of the piece and click the right mouse button once. For more information on rotating pieces, refer to the Rotate command in the Piece Menu chapter or the Rotate tool in the Tools chapter. Rotating Pieces with the Rotate Tool The right mouse button can be used with the Rotate Icon. Refer to the Rotate tool in the Icons chapter or the Rotate command in the Piece menu for more information about rotating pieces. Moving Pieces with the Bump, Bump/Rotate, and Jump/Rotate Tools The right mouse button is used with the Bump, Bump/Rotate, and Jump/Rotate Tools to place pieces. Refer to the Tools chapter to learn more about bumping and jumping pieces on the marker. Mark Manual468 Moving Overlapped Pieces Click the right and left mouse buttons simultaneously over an overlapped piece. The overlapped piece will move directly to the right of the piece it is overlapping. Fabric Spreading Methods To fold pieces in a marker, the correct spreading method must be defined in the Marker Definitions command of the Marker menu. The usage of folded pieces depends on the way the material has been spread. Single Ply will not allow folded pieces. Tubular pieces can be folded on the upper or lower edges of the marker. Tubular markers must have at least 2 plies. Faced pieces can be folded on the right and left edges or the marker. Faced markers must have at least 2 plies. Folded Pieces can be folded on the upper, lower, right, and left edges of the marker. Folded markers must have at least 2 plies. If you wish to fold pieces into quarters, you must have at least 4 plies. ! Note: For more information on spreading methods, refer to the Marker Definitions section of the Marker chapter. Defining Pieces as Foldable Foldable pieces in the up and down directions will have the letter U beside them. Foldable pieces in the left and right directions will have the letter S beside them. To define pieces as foldable, use the Info or All Sizes Info commands in the Piece menu or press Ctrl+U for up and down directions and Ctrl+L for left and right directions. To define pieces as not foldable, use the Info or All Sizes Info commands in the Piece menu or select the piece and press Ctrl+Q. ! Note: Non-symmetric pieces can be defined as foldable. Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands 469 Placing Folded Pieces Use the numeric keypad (make sure the NUM LOCK is on) to place folded pieces. Press the desired number key while placing a folded piece. You can only fold pieces taken from the Piece menu. ! Note: When double clicking the mouse cursor must be within the marker area and the piece in the piece menu, NOT on the marker. Fold along the top double click + U or Up Arrow (8) from key pad Fold along the lower edge double click + D or Down Arrow (2) from key pad Fold along the left edge double click + L or (4) Fold along the right edge double click + R or (6) Quartered piece in the Upper Left corner double click + Home (7) Quartered piece in the Lower Left corner double click + End (1) Quartered piece in the Upper Right corner double click + PgUp (9) Quartered piece in the Lower Right corner double click + PgDn (3) ! Note: A folded piece cannot be part of a group. For more information on creating and keeping groups, refer to the Group chapter. Unfolding Pieces To unfold a piece, double click on the placed, folded piece. The piece will be returned to the menu. The piece can be replaced at anytime. Mark Manual470 Scroll Bars Automatic Utility There is a new scroll bar automatic utility when you hold a piece on the working area with the âHand Toolâ (drag tool), you can automatically move the scroll bars. Dragging the piece on the working area while you hold the piece will move automatically the two scroll bars (horizontal and vertical) according to the piece location on the working area. Creating a Group Click and drag a box around the desired pieces on the marker, or press and hold the Shift key and click to add other pieces to the group. A minimum of two pieces is required to create a group. ! Tip: The pieces will move as a group until a different piece is selected. All of the grouped pieces will move simultaneously by clicking inside one of the grouped objects and dragging it to the desired location. You can also use the Bump and Jump tools to reposition a group anywhere on the marker. Most commands and tools that work on one piece will also work on a group. ! Note: For more information on creating and keeping groups, refer to the Group chapter. Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands 471 Shortcut Key Table: Key Special keys Menu command Description N Ctrl File / New Close the current Marker and create a new O Ctrl File / Open⦠Open an existing Marker S Ctrl File / Save Save the current Marker F4 Alt File / Exit Exit I Ctrl Piece / Info... Piece information dialog H Ctrl Piece / Make Hole Enable nesting of other pieces inside selected piece E Ctrl Piece / Internals⦠General Internal element attributes P Ctrl Piece / Place Selected Pieces / Place Place the selected pieces to Marker P Ctrl + Shift Piece / Place Selected Pieces / Place One Set Place one set of the selected pieces Mark Manual472 P Ctrl + Alt + Shift Piece / Place Selected Pieces / Place All Place all allowed selected pieces R Ctrl Marker / Remove Pieces Remove selected pieces from the Marker ââ ââ D Ctrl Marker / Duplicate Duplicate the selected pieces on the Marker M Ctrl Marker / Marker Definitions... Open Marker definitions dialog Z Ctrl Marker / Undo Undo the last Marker action Shift Marker / Relate Piece to Stripes⦠Define the selected piece position relative to the Stripes M Ctrl + Alt Marker / Alignment / Horizontal by Marker Center Align the selected pieces to marker center H Ctrl + Alt Marker / Alignment / Horizontal by Piece Center Horizontally Align the selected pieces to adjustment piece center Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands 473 Alt Marker / Alignment / Horizontal by Down Limit Horizontally Align the selected pieces to lower limit Alt Marker / Alignment / Horizontal by Up Limit Horizontally Align the selected pieces to upper limit V Ctrl + Alt Marker / Alignment / Vertical by Piece Center Vertically Align the selected pieces to adjustment piece center Alt Marker / Alignment / Vertical by Left Limit Vertically Align the selected pieces to left limit Right arrow> Alt Marker / Alignment / Vertical by Right Limit Vertically Align the selected pieces to right limit B Ctrl Grouping / Block Fuse Define a Fusing box around a selected Group J Ctrl Nesting / Compact Arrangement Run Squeeze Mark Manual474 A Ctrl Nesting / Stop Batch Stop Batch File Help / Index Help Shift Context Help U Ctrl Allows Up/Down side folding for selected piece L Ctrl Allows Left/Right side folding for selected piece Q Ctrl Disable folding for selected piece R Ctrl + Alt Redraw Marker Cancel Marker redraw Ctrl + Shift Print screen B Ctrl + Alt Enable OpStop on the selected piece On/Off F Ctrl Fill placed pieces with color On/Off T Ctrl Display pieces descriptions On/Off Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands 475 Shift selected pieces down Shift selected pieces up Shift selected pieces left Shift selected pieces right Ctrl Flip selected pieces right ââ Ctrl + Shift Flip selected pieces up Shift ââ Ctrl Rotate selected pieces 90 degrees Ctrl Rotate selected pieces 180 degrees Ctrl Adjust left Alt ââ Ctrl Adjust up Mark Manual476 Alt ââ Ctrl Adjust down Alt ââ Ctrl Adjust right Alt ââ Ctrl Adjust left - up Alt ââ Ctrl Adjust left - down Alt ââ Ctrl Adjust right - down Alt ââ Ctrl Adjust right - up Alt ââ Glossary Terms 477 Glossary Terms AAMA Refers to a âneutralâ file format created by the American Apparel Manufacturing Association. About Selecting the About icon on the Standard toolbar in OptiTex PDS or the Marker toolbar in OptiTex Mark activates a dialog box displaying the version of software currently in use. Align A command found in the Edit Menu of OptiTex PDS that repositions points horizontally, vertically, or at an assigned angle based on the selection of two or more points. Array A command found in the Marker Menu of OptiTex Mark, which allows selected piece(s) to be arranged into rows and columns automatically on the marker as specified in the Array dialog box. Baseline Baseline, also referred to as a grainline, controls the pattern pieceâs alignment in the working area and on the marker. Base Size The pattern size from which the program bases pattern changes and grade. Glossary Terms478 Buffer An assigned area of space placed on a single pattern or patterns in OptiTex Mark. A buffer is often used to create extra space between pattern pieces when cutting difficult fabrics. Bundle A pattern making term that refers to all patterns pieces necessary to make one complete item or Set. Click The action of pressing down on the left mouse button to select an object or command on the screen. Clipboard A location on the computer where items are stored when they are cut or copied from a file or document. Items remain on the clipboard until another item is cut or copied. Contour The perimeter of the pattern piece. Cursor The screen symbol (e.g. the arrow) that indicates the position of the mouse on the computer screen. Glossary Terms 479 Delta Value This refers to the X and Y-axis used for directional movement on the working area. The X-axis represents the horizontal movement and the Y-axis represents the vertical movement. Dialog Box The pop-up window that appears while using editing tools allowing the user to insert parameters for a specific command. Digitizing The process of converting a two-dimensional object into data points as digital numbers, which are imputed into the computer to represent the pattern pieces. Directory User-defined sections on the computer were file could be stored. ( e. g. C:\Optitex7\Examples). Display File A marker file, usually containing one or more design files, which has been nested. (e.g. filename.dsp). DXF The graphical Data Exchange Format used by CAD systems to transfer geometric information. Drive The address of the storage media to be accessed: usually A and B for removable diskettes and C, D for permanent hard disk or CD-ROM drive. Glossary Terms480 DSN File DSN is the SGS extension for a OptiTex PDS file. DSP File DSP is the SGS extension for a Mark file. EXE Extension denoting a program file. This is a compiled computer program executable from DOS or from Windows by typing the file name on the command line and pressing the Enter key (DOS) or by double click on its name (Windows). Exit Normal termination of software program. Field The white spaces in a dialog box where information can be entered. File Extension The three letters suffix at the end of a filename, which defines the format. For example: DSP, DSN, EXE, etc. Flipping The act of transposing the pattern piece horizontally or vertically while it is located in the working area. Glossary Terms 481 Global Rule A grading rule based on the total number of grading points of any pattern. Also called, âAll Points Ruleâ. Graded Pattern A pattern that points have been assigned grading rules to control the way a piece changes from size to another. Grading The process of assigning measurement increments to a pattern to determine how each size of the pattern should increase or decrease in relation to the previous size. Grading Point A point on the pattern contour, line and curve, which you can attach a grading value. Grading Rule The assigned measurement increments to define the grading at a point on the pattern piece for all sizes. There are three types of grading rules: fixed, point and global. Grading Table A display window activated from the Grading Menu that displays the assigned measurement increments for previously established grading rules. Glossary Terms482 Grainline Grainline, also referred to as a baseline, controls the pattern pieceâs alignment in the working area and on the marker. Graphic Standard The ASCII geometry in CAD/CAM file formats, which renders them compatible with SGS programs. Grayed Out Refers to features or commands that are unavailable at the current time. Features and commands are typically grayed out when a selected item on the piece does not correspond to the feature or command. Group A term used in OptiTex Mark to describe two or more selected patterns that have been added to the pattern list and nested on the marker as a single unit. The Group is established by highlighting the pieces and selecting Keep in the Grouping Menu of OptiTex Mark. Handle Point Any notch or button with the number 1. Hard Drive A device made of aluminum disks coated with iron oxide permanently mounted in the computer to store data and programs. Hard disks have more storage capacity than floppy disks. Glossary Terms 483 Hex Hexadecimal. A number written in base 16, which contains 16 possible digits: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A (10), B (11), C (12), D (13), E (14) and F (15). Icon Icons are located on the toolbars and provide the pattern maker with fast access to the design tools. Internals Lines or points which are not located on the contour, and which can be used for style or cutting purposes. Intersections A term used in OptiTex Mark to describe the points where nested patterns overlap on the marker area. Invert To relocate the first point on a selected line segment from one end the opposite end. This command can be found in the Edit Menu of OptiTex PDS by selecting Segment and Show. Key A small piece of hardware approximately 1.5â by 2â with 25 small prongs on one end and 25 small inlets or holes on the other end. This key is plugged into a parallel port on the back of the computer. If the computer has a printer attached, the key is plugged into the back of the printer plug as if to piggyback on the printer plugs. This item is what permits SGS software to run on your computer. When this key is not plugged into the back of the computer, a âHASP plug not foundâ error displays on the screen in the HASP Error Glossary Terms484 Message dialog box. Authorizer keys are designed to prevent illegal copying and illegal use of software. An authorizer key is also referred to as, Plug, Security Lock, Lock or Dangle. Landscape Mode The Landscape mode is the opposite of Portrait Mode in printer setup. It allows output to be printed in the width direction of the paper. Lock See âKey â. Marker The physical layout of all the pieces in a style cut from the same material at the same time. Marker File A file created in OptiTex Mark that contains a nested marker. Marker Size The dimensions of the marker that have been specified in the Marker Definitions dialog box of the Marker Menu in OptiTex Mark. Mirror This command creates a symmetrical pattern piece by joining two pieces, the original and a duplicate inverted piece, at a two-point line segment that is selected before using the Mirror command from the Piece Menu in OptiTex PDS. Glossary Terms 485 Nest A term used to indicate the close placement of pieces on a marker layout. Network A collection of devices such as computers and printers, that are connected together. A network is a tool for communication that allows users to store and retrieve information, share printers and exchange information. Nested Pattern A pattern that is drawn to show more than one size of the piece stacked on top of each other also called a stacked piece or graded nest. Nesting The placement of pieces on a marker to achieve the most compact and efficient layout. Notch A symbol placed on a pattern to indicate where the piece should be aligned with another piece when the two are sewn together. On-line Help Help accessed by using either the F1 key for general index or Shift F1 keys for specific help when an option or command is selected. Order An order is generated in OptiTex Mark to set up the marker. The order will include information such as the design files to be nested on the marker, the fabric width, and the number of each piece in the design file. Glossary Terms486 Output Refers to data that is either printed or plotted. Path The alphanumeric code that guides the computer to a specific drive/ directory/file based on the default selection defined in Autoexec.bat file. Piece Display Bar Refers to a pictorial list of pieces within a design file. The Piece Display Bar shows a small picture of each piece in a design file. Piece List A window that is activated from the Display Menu in OptiTex PDS and displays the pattern pieces for the current design file. Plot File A file created for printing purposes. The resulting plot file can be sent to the output device from any PC (not necessarily equipped with SGS software) with the DOS Copy command. Point The part of a pieceâs boundary lines used to control the shape of the piece. A point may be a grading point or a non-grading point. Point Rule A rule, which is attached to a specific point and is related to the number of sizes which are currently open, and only to those sizes. Glossary Terms 487 Polyline Contour elements with shared attributes. (See also Single Elements). Pop-up Menu A list of options that appear on the screen after the right mouse button is clicked. Pop-up Window A window displayed on the working area as a result of user selected option. Portrait Mode The Portrait Mode is the opposite of Landscape Mode in printer setup. It allows output to be printed in a lengthwise direction on the paper. Remainders The number of unplaced pieces in a marker file. Right Mouse Click The action of pressing down on the right mouse button to select an object or command on the screen. Round The act of modifying an angle into a curve. Rule Library A collection of existing grading rules which can be attached to a pattern. Glossary Terms488 Scroll When the number of items in a window/dialog box exceeds the amount of space for display, an elevator bar appears at the right. By positioning the mouse on this bar, the user can view all items at one window height. Security Lock See âKey â. Selected Piece The piece displayed in the working area with a dashed line around the piece perimeter. Selection Tool The screen symbol (e.g. the arrow) that indicates the position of the mouse on the computer screen. Set A pattern making term that refers to all pattern pieces necessary to make one complete item or Bundle. Shrink Factor The amount a pattern is increased or decreased to allow for the dimensional of the fabric. Size List The box displaying all sizes being produced for a specific design file. Glossary Terms 489 Snap When using a grid on the working area in OptiTex PDS, this option causes the cursor to jump to the nearest point, whether it be a contour point, grid point or pieceâs end point (grid points have priority). Solution File A completed order of nested patterns. Stack Point One point on a nested pattern where the grading is set at 0,0 for all sizes in the nest. Swap Pieces This icon in OptiTex PDS interchanges the original pattern piece in the piece display bar with the piece being edited in the working area. Toggle Refers to the action of turning a command on/off by checking or unchecking an item. For example, many options in the Display Menu toggle between displaying on screen or not displaying on screen. Tolerance Value The maximum distance between two points on a contour to treat the points as a single point. Toolbar A collection of icons positioned in a row on the screen. Toolbars provide easy access to commands and features when using the mouse. Glossary Terms490 Tools Design functions in the software that enables the patternmaker to manipulate patterns. Waste Limits This area is created on the markers edge prevents the cutting of pieces were the fabric in flawed. The area can be defined in the Marker Menu under Marker Definitions. Working Area The area of the screen where pattern pieces are placed for editing. WYSIWYG This stands for, âWhat You See Is What You Get.â This concept is used in the SGS software to indicate that what appears on the computer screen is what will be printed or plotted onto paper. X, Y Coordinates A method of defining the horizontal (x) and vertical (y) location of grade points, notch attributes, and internals. Index A Add Point, 176 All, 191 Apply, 183 Area/Perimeter, 188 Arrows, 182 About OptiTex PDS, 23 All Sizes, 36 Arrow/Selection Tool, 21 Alert on Start, 134 Annotation, 104, 122 Alignment, 212 Area Usage, 230 Auto Save of Markers, 294 AutoNest Queue, 311 Autonesting of Selected Pieces, 291 Autonesting Setup, 292 B Buffer, 178 Buffering, 162 Base Size Mark, 105, 122 Best Quality, 105, 123 Boundary Lines, 119 Browse, 99 Bulge (Corde Error) Inches, 148 Bump, 37, 42 Batch Commands:, 302 Batch Messages, 311 Browse, 295 Block Fuse, 253 Baseline, 26 C Code, 161,204 Current, 188 Current Type, 191 Cad Files to Import, 110 Change Log, 136 Chapter 4 File Menu, 71 Copies, 135 Create NST-file (cncKad) too, 99 Current Plotter, 149 Curve Points, 120 Context Help, 23 Check Current Solution, 221 Clear Marker (Ctrl+C), 202 Columns, 210 Copy Marker, 208 Current Trace, 228 Colors According to Sets, 258 cut, 261 Continue, 289 Continue Batch, 311 Create NST-file (cncKad) too, 296 D Delete, 183 Delete a Piece:, 170 Delete Point, 177 Description, 161 Default Font Size (Inches), 142 Dictionary Dialog Box, 121 Drill Holes, 120 Depth, 30 Disengaging a Tool, 20 Delete Unused, 220 Description, 204 Detect Intersections, 221 Duplicate (Ctrl+D), 208 Display Pieces on Marker, 257 Duplicate Marker, 296 E Edit Piece, 174 Edit Notch Dialog Box, 30 Engaging a Tool, 19 Exit (Alt+F4), 157 Export to CAD/CAM Files, 100 Enable Multiple Cutting of Segments, 197 Enable Quality Overflow, 211 Ending Point, 228 F Flip, 176, 205 Flip Vertically, 171, 172 File Format, 110, 111 Index File Name and Browse, 134 Find now, 88 Finder Dialog, 86 Format, 102, 119, 138 Fill with Color (Ctrl+F), 258 Fabric Pattern, 233 Faced (LR), 200 G Gap After Plotting, 141 Grain (Base) Lines, 120 Global Change Internal s Dialog Box, 190 Global Change Internalâs Parameters, 189 Global Info, 168 Global Set, 188 H Hole and Contour, 189 Holes and Internal Contours, 185 Hide Stripes, 263 Horizontal by Marker Center, 212 History, 74, 75, 76 I Info (Ctrl+I), 159 Internal Text, 170 Internals (Ctrl+E), 180 Inverse, 183 Ignore CR. / LF, 116 Ignore Frame, 116 Internals By Tools, 261 Ignore Internals, 112 Import from CAD/CAM Files, 108 Internal Cut, 120 Internal Lines (draw), 120 J Join Pieces, 174 L Layers Table Dialog Box, 119 Look in subfolders, 87 Length Depth Radius, 181 Legal Intersection, 207 Length, 199 M Make Hole (Ctrl+H), 173 Max Tilt, 164 Mirror, 176 Mode,33, 181 Move Point, 178 Make DSN files, 111 Measure, 27, 28 Manual Page Replace, 139 Marker Boundary, 146 Marker Header, 146 Marker, 234 Marker Definitions (Ctrl+M), 197 Marker Menu, 197 Match case, 88 Match whole word only, 88 Material, 111 Material Code, 105, 122 Material filter, 87 Max Grade Angle, 115 Merge Few Markers, 74 Min. Plot Spline Segment, 141 Minimal Plot/Cut line, 141 Marker Full Length, 263 N Name, 138 Network Plotting, 134 New (Ctrl+N),21, 71 No Size, 111 Notches, 120,260 Note, 136 Number of Pens, 145 Nest++, 293 Nesting Menu, 289 No.of plies reserved, 206 Number of Plies, 199, 231 O Operation Stop,31, 182 Index Original, 176 Open Design Files, 77 Open file, 88 Open Marker File (Ctrl + O), 71 Open Style File, 91 Order by Tools, 147 Orientation, 105, 123 Output Manager INI File, 149 Optimize Cutter Ordering, 223 O Page in Center, 139 P Pieces, 190 Place (CTRL+P), 191 Place All (CTRL+SHIFT+ALT+P), 192 Place Folded Down, 194 Place Folded Left, 192 Place Folded Right, 193 Place Folded Up, 193 Place Left Down, 195 Place Left Up, 194 Place One Set (CTRL+SHIFT+P), 192 Place right Down, 196 Place Right Up, 195 Plies, 161 Print Report, 164, 167 Piece Description, 36 Pointer, 21 Piece Code, 104, 122 Piece Code filter, 87 Piece Name, 104, 122, 161 Piece name filter, 87 Plot, 123, 124 Plot Continuous, 146 Plot Setting Dialog Box, 137 Plotter (Output Manager) Setup, 124 Plotter Font File, 142 Plotter Page Size (inches), 140 Plotter Setting, 137 Print,150 299, 300 Print All, 300 Pattern Height (Y Value), 239 Performing Optimum Calculations:, 229 Piece Name, 204 Piece Parameters, 203 Placed Piece Cutter Order, 226 Placement on marker, 205 Piece Description, 259 Points (Buttons), 260 Q Quality Lines, 121 Quantity, 105, 111, 122,161 Quality, 261 R Remainders, 162 Rotate, 176, 178 Radius, 33 Redraw, 25 Rotate by 90 or 180, 40 Rotate from Center, 41 Rotate from Specific Point, 41 Remove on End, 135 Report, 93 Report to Log, 136 Restore Defaults, 105, 121, 123 Relate Piece to Stripes (Shift+Home), 243 Remove (DELor CTRL+R), 202 Replace Pieces on Marker, 215 Rotate, 205 S Save, 22 Show Cut/Plot Ordering, 36 Stop, 25, 289 Save (Ctrl + S), 95 Save As, 95 Save as Type, 97 Save Current Nesting, 97 Save only nested parts (and zero remainders), 100 Scale Factor, 146 Scale Factor Unit, 102 select, 89 Setup, 112 Sew Lines, 120 Show file name only, 87 Size Name, 104, 122, 204, 259 Index Spline Angle, 115 Style file name, 86,88 Style Name, 122 Save only nested parts (and zero remainders), 296 Selected Design File, 299 Solutions Report Details dialog box, 299 Solutions Reports, 297 Start Batch, 300 Stop Batch, 310 Sequence, 189 Set Sequence #, 182 Set Size, 191 Show Numbers, 182 Sort, 182 Stripe Adjust Number, 181 Sequence Number During Cutting, 227 Singular, 199 Starting Point, 228 Stop before cutting, 207 Stripe Adjust According To Set Only, 241 Stripe Definition, 239 Stripes Definitions Dialog Box, 240 Substitute, 217 Show Cut/Plot Ordering, 263 Show Pieces List, 266 T To Merge Marker Files:, 74 To Output Using the OutMan Print Manager:, 126 Tolerance, 113 Turn (Grade) Points, 119 To Define Stripes:, 239 To Optimize the Piece:, 226 To Relate Pieces (With Stripe Adjust Notches Or Buttons) To a Stripe:, 244 To Replace Pieces, 215 Tool, 228 Tubular (UD), 200 Type of Material, 201 Text, 33 To Add a Button:, 31 To Add a Notch:, 28 To Add Internal Text To a Piece:, 34 To Delete a Notch:, 28 To Edit a Button:, 32 To Edit a Notch:, 29 To Rotate from a Specific Point On the Selected Piece(s):, 41 To Rotate a Piece within the Marker:, 179 To Rotate a Source Piece:, 179 To Set All Sizes Info:, 167 To Set Global Info for all Sizes on All Pieces:, 169 To Edit a Selected Piece:, 175 To Continue Nesting:, 289 To Create a Batch File, 302 To Start a Batch, 301 To Start Auto-Nest, 290 To View and print the log file, 297 Total, 298 To Cut a Piece:, 177 To Edit a Selected Piece:, 175 To Flip an Image Horizontally:, 172 U Update, 91 Use in File Header, 140 Use Bite Offset, 140 Use CL/LF in Code, 140 Use Output Manager, 134, 148 Use Plotterâs Built in Fonts, 142 V Vertical by Piece Center, 215 W Write Reports to file, 99, 296 Width,30 199 Working Units, 247 X X, 240 X End, 200 X Origin, 200 Y Y, 240 Y End, 200 Index Y Origin, 200 Z Zoom In, 26 Zoom all Pieces on Marker, 264 SGS Mark User Manual License Agreement Table of Contents Chapter 1: Introduction and Istallation Procedures Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars Chapter 3: File Menu Chapter 4: Piece Menu Chapter 5: Marker Menu Chapter 6: Group Menu Chapter 7: View Menu Chapter 8: Options Menu Chapter 9: Nesting Menu Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation Chapter 11: Help Menu Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands Glossary Terms Index